Contents

Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 462
1 of 462

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the con tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

2535844314Y 2535844314

Order no. P253 1337 13 Part no. 253 584 43 14 Edition B-2021

GLC Operator's Manual

Mercedes-BenzMe rce

de s-B

en z

GL C

Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany

Front passenger airbag warning

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

As at 17.06.20

Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment

R Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2535844314

2535844314

Symbols ........................................................ 5

At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10 Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) ......................................................... 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18

Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20

General notes ............................................. 22 Protecting the environment .......................... 22 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 22 Operator's Manual ........................................ 23 Service and vehicle operation ....................... 24 Operating safety ........................................... 25 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... 26 Diagnostics connection ................................ 27

Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 28 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 28 Sport Utility Vehicle ...................................... 29 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ......................................................... 29 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 30 Reporting safety defects ............................... 30 Limited Warranty .......................................... 31 QR code for rescue card ............................... 31 Data storage ................................................. 31 Copyright ...................................................... 36

Occupant safety ......................................... 37 Restraint system ........................................... 37 Seat belts ..................................................... 39 Airbags ......................................................... 43 PRE-SAFE system ........................................ 51 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................ 52 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 65

Opening and closing .................................. 66 SmartKey ...................................................... 66 Doors ............................................................ 70

Cargo compartment ..................................... 73 Side windows ................................................ 78 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 82 Roller sun blinds ........................................... 86 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 86

Seats and stowing ..................................... 90 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................... 90 Seats ............................................................ 91 Steering wheel .............................................. 98 Easy entry and exit feature ........................... 99 Memory function ........................................ 101 Stowage areas ............................................ 102 Sockets ....................................................... 116 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 118 Installing/removing the floor mats .............. 119

Light and visibility .................................... 121 Exterior lighting ........................................... 121 Interior lighting ........................................... 126 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 127

2 Contents

Mirrors ........................................................ 131

Climate control ........................................ 135 Overview of climate control systems .......... 135 Operating the climate control system ......... 136

Driving and parking .................................. 141 Driving ........................................................ 141 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 154 Automatic transmission .............................. 157 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 161 Refueling ..................................................... 162 Parking ....................................................... 164 Driving and driving safety systems .............. 171 Trailer hitch ................................................ 229 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 233

Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 234 Notes on the instrument display and on- board computer .......................................... 234 Instrument display overview ....................... 235

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 236 Operating the on-board computer .............. 236 Overview of displays on the multifunc tion display ................................................. 237 Head-up Display ......................................... 237

MBUX multimedia system ....................... 240 Overview and operation .............................. 240 System settings .......................................... 248 Navigation .................................................. 252 Telephone ................................................... 258 Mercedes me and apps ............................... 261 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 268 Radio & media ............................................ 272 Sound settings ............................................ 279

Maintenance and care ............................. 280 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 280 Engine compartment .................................. 281 Cleaning and care ....................................... 288

Breakdown assistance ............................ 295 Emergency .................................................. 295 Flat tire ....................................................... 296 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 302 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 307 Electrical fuses ............................................ 312

Wheels and tires ...................................... 316 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 316 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 316 Notes on snow chains ................................. 317 Tire pressure ............................................... 317 Loading the vehicle ..................................... 324 Tire labeling ................................................ 328 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 333 Changing a wheel ....................................... 336 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 345

Technical data .......................................... 348 Notes on technical data .............................. 348 Vehicle electronics ..................................... 348

Contents 3

Radio operating permits for vehicle com ponents ...................................................... 350 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ 350 Operating fluids .......................................... 352 Vehicle data ................................................ 359 Trailer hitch ................................................. 361

Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps .............................................. 363 Display messages ....................................... 363 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 411

Index ......................................................... 426

4 Contents

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol lowing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Information on the multifunction dis

play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause

Symbols 5

Left-hand-drive vehicles

6 At a glance Cockpit

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 159

2 Combination switch 122

3 Instrument display 235

4 DIRECT SELECT lever 157

5 Media display 240

6 Climate control systems 136

7 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 48

8 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applica tions

242

9 Hazard warning light system 123

A Glove box 105

B Storage compartment 105

C Controller for volume and switching sound on/off

240

D Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off

240

E Active Parking Assist 225

F ESP 174

G Touchpad 242

H ECO start/stop function 153

I Manual gearshifting 159

J Sets the vehicle level 208

K DYNAMIC SELECT switch 156

L Start/stop button 142

M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem

236

N Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 99

Switches the steering wheel heater on/off 99

O Control panel:

On-board computer 236

Cruise control 181

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 185

P Diagnostics connection 27

Q Opens the hood 281

At a glance Cockpit 7

R Electric parking brake 168 S Light switch 121

8 At a glance Cockpit

Instrument Display (standard)

10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

1L Distance warning 421

2 Power steering 414

3 #! Turn signal lights 122

4 ; Check Engine 415

5 Electric parking brake (red) 418

F USA only

! Canada only

6 Brakes (red) 418

$ USA only

J Canada only

7 Coolant temperature 415

8 Coolant temperature display 235

9 Recuperative Brake System, USA only 418

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 418

A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 418

B ! ABS 421

C 6 Restraint system 413

D Seat belt 413

E K High beam 122

F L Low beam 121

G 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

415

H Fuel level 235

I T Parking lamps 121

J R Rear fog lamp 122

K h Tire pressure monitoring system 424

L ESP OFF 421

M ESP 421

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

Widescreen cockpit instrument display

12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit)

1 #! Turn signal lights 122

2 R Rear fog lamp 122

3 K High beam 122

L Low beam 121

T Parking lamps 121

4 Coolant temperature 415

5 Coolant temperature display 235

6L Distance warning 421

7 Seat belt 413

8 h Tire pressure monitoring system 424

9 Power steering 414

A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 418

B Electric parking brake (red) 418

F USA only

! Canada only

C 6 Restraint system 413

D Brakes (red) 418

$ USA only

J Canada only

E 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

415

F Fuel level 235

G Recuperative Brake System, USA only 418

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 418

H # Electrical malfunction 415

I ; Check Engine 415

J ! ABS 421

K ESP OFF 421

ESP 421

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) 13

14 At a glance Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors

2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off

126

3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con trol on/off

126

4 G SOS button 263

5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

126

6 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

126

7 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off

126

8; me button 263

9 Eyeglasses compartment

A 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

82

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 82

B Inside rearview mirror 132

At a glance Overhead control panel 15

16 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment

1 Operates the memory function 102

2 Adjusts the seats electrically 93

3 Switches the seat heating on/off 96

4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 97

5 Operates the outside mirrors 131

6 Opens/closes the left side window 78

7 Opens/closes the right side window 78

8 Opens/closes the tailgate 73

9 Opens/closes the rear right side window 78

A Opens/closes the rear left side window 78

B Child safety lock for the rear passenger com partment side windows

65

C Opens the door 70

D Locks/unlocks the vehicle 70

E Sets the seat fore-and-aft position 91

F Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support 94

G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system 96

H Adjusts the head restraints 94

I Adjusts the seat height 91

J Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 91

At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 17

18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1 B-pillar with:

QR code for accessing the rescue card 31

2 Safety vests 295

3 me button and SOS button 263

4 To check and refill operating fluids 352

5 To tow-start and tow away 308

6 Flat tire 296

7 Starting assistance 306

8 Hazard warning light system 123

9 Fuel filler flap with:

information label on fuel type 162

Information label on tire pressure 319

QR code for accessing the rescue card 31

A To tow-start and tow away 308

B Warning triangle 295

C TIREFIT kit 298

D First-aid kit (soft sided) 296

At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5

The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the

Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find

quick answers to questions about the opera tion of the vehicle.

R Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for

certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle

functions. R Messages: receive additional information

about the messages in the Instrument Dis play. R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally

saved bookmarks. R Language: select the language for the Digital

Operator's Manual.

1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu

Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold

20 Digital Operator's Manual

ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man ual is deactivated while driving.

Digital Operator's Manual 21

Protecting the environment

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor

rect.

# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the

vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration

and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each

gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.

Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon ditioned components

MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.

22 General notes

# Use recycled reconditioned compo nents and parts from MercedesBenz AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have aftermarket installation of acces

sories carried out at a qualified special ist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used.

More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 350) when ordering Mercedes- Benz GenuineParts.

Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations.

General notes 23

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not

be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi

cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane

number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu ment wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We

24 General notes

can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazard ous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating safety

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures

To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and

maintenance work as well any required

repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts

Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec

tronic component parts or their soft ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

General notes 25

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo nents

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a

high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an

obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or

suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

or # If driving safety is impaired while con

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work shop.

Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications

26 General notes

not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno vation, Science and Economic Development Can adas RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the party responsible is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that

you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.

General notes 27

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and condi tions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos tics connection can lead to emissions monitor ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor rectly carry out the work required on your vehi cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works.

For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and

conversions R Work on electronic components

MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations

28 General notes

R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Sport Utility Vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident when the center of gravity is too high

The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adap ted to the road conditions. # Always adapt your speed and driving

style to the vehicle's driving character istics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles. If this type of vehicle is not driven safely, an acci dent can occur, the vehicle can roll over and occupants can suffer serious or even fatal inju ries.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the

area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi bility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes- Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

General notes 29

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov

Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes- Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll- free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or

30 General notes

819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat

ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage.

QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storage Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi cle. Control units process data which, for exam ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable comfort or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general informa tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what pur pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available on line and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences

General notes 31

about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufac turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame work, authorized to read out data from the vehi cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,

longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas tened seat belts display

R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components,

such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system

components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa

tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle

damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac

32 General notes

turer is subject to product liability. For this rea son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the custom er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with

an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par ticular, when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transfer red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, the day/night mode and other general vehicle sta tuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

General notes 33

Online services

Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func tions can be used via the wireless network con nection. This includes online services and appli cations/apps provided to you by the manufac turer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed

and used, other than for the provision of serv ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con tractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi media system or Mercedes me connect, addi tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the

34 General notes

MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were

operating R Whether or not the driver and front

passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened

R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash

Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December

General notes 35

2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Copyright Free and open source software

Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks

R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade

marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen

tex Corporation.

R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. R Burmester is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft and Windows Media are regis

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq

uity Digital Corporation. R Gracenote is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

36 General notes

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)

tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint

system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any

electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system functionality

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys

Occupant safety 37

tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an acci dent

How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if

only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Front Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal

impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Rear Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal

impact, rear impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron

tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,

frontal impact

38 Occupant safety

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 48).

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig gered or an airbag deployed.

If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear

ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz

ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo rate, for example.

Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu

pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 90).

Occupant safety 39

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must

fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen

ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible

across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin

ted, abrasive or fragile objects.

R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 102). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 56). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 53).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

40 Occupant safety

# Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys tem.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi

fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten sioning Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera tional and are unable to perform their inten ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt

is fully retracted.

Releasing the rear passenger compartment center seat belt

If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, it may not be possible to pull out the rear passenger compartment center seat belt. The seat belt must be released. # Pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in

(25 mm) at the seat belt outlet on the seat backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released.

Occupant safety 41

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor responding seat.

# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet3 into the desired position.

# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet3 locks into position.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the front- passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front- passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 43).

42 Occupant safety

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.

Releasing seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger

have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their

seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Airbags Overview of airbags

1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window curtain airbag 5 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Occupant safety 43

Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 62). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 48).

* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat.

R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protective capacity of the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt.

44 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep

as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and front

passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 90). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet

on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle,

observe the additional notes (/ page 53). R Always store and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile

navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

Occupant safety 45

R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 43).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded.

In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. # Always have work on the doors or door

trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat.

46 Occupant safety

# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi

tioned correctly (/ page 52). R Always comply with the child restraint sys

tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or

behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust

ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system

must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut off. # Do not place any objects between the

sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 39). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

Occupant safety 47

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 48).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.

48 Occupant safety

The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may

deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger

airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa

bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag

shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con tinuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 62). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.

Occupant safety 49

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward- facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle inte

rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet

and the front passenger seat accord ingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 62). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person

with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.

50 Occupant safety

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor

rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 62)

PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion)

PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the

sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: move the

front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase

the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi

media system is switched on, generates a

brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Occupant safety 51

Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle

is stationary. This brake application is can celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations: R When backing up

or

R When the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving

or R When entering or exiting a parking space

while using Active Parking Assist

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 53).

Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri

ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal

ling a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat

52 Occupant safety

R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat

belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint sys tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal

lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys tem (/ page 57).

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Occupant safety 53

Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur

er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems

correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instructions.

R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 57).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 60).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 62). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 62). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 48).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.

54 Occupant safety

# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child

restraint systems that have been dam aged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child

restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Occupant safety 55

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic

ular, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 59).

Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,

ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 48). R Observe the notes on automatic front

passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 46)

Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 59).

Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord

ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seal belt retractor

again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

56 Occupant safety

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system: # When installing a child restraint system,

always observe the manufacturer's installa tion and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual.

# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.

# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor: # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.

# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

Deactivating the special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt

buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to

the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.

R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee ded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

Occupant safety 57

# If the child and the child restraint sys tem together weigh more than the per missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat

ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight

group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys tem.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: the backrest of the child restraint system must

lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

58 Occupant safety

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket

Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi cle.

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.

# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro tective function. This may also cause addi tional injuries.

# Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible. If the child restraint system is equipped

with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.

Occupant safety 59

# If necessary, slide head restraint1 upwards (/ page 95).

# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufactur er's installation instructions.

# Guide Top Tether belt5 under head restraint1 between the two head restraint bars.

# Guide Top Tether belt5 downwards between cargo compartment cover3 and seat backrest2.

# Hook Top Tether hook6 of Top Tether belt 5 into Top Tether anchorage4 without twisting.

# Tension Top Tether belt5. In doing so, com ply with the child restraint system manufac turer's installation instructions.

# If necessary, slide head restraint1 down wards (/ page 95). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt5.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

60 Occupant safety

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the

vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 56). # Install the child restraint system.

The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

Occupant safety 61

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Observe the specific instructions for the rear ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 62). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 48). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 62).

O Observe the child restraint system manufac turer's installation and operating instruc tions.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the

62 Occupant safety

vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 56).

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

Occupant safety 63

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic

ular, unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are traveling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).

# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

64 Occupant safety

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

# To activate/deactivate: press button2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R Indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on

the driver's door

R Indicator lamp1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger

other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.

# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier.

Occupant safety 65

SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.

SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks

2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm

% If indicator lamp2 does not light up after pressing the or button, the bat tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 68). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Tailgate

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti- theft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.

66 Opening and closing

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm

Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.

# To activate: press button1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: briefly press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,

with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch

the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the SmartKey functions

If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the button on the

SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the Smart Key.

% When the vehicle is started with the Smart Key in the storage compartment of the cen ter console, the SmartKey functions are automatically activated (/ page 143).

Opening and closing 67

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

# Press release knob1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages in the intermediate position.

# Press release knob1 again and fully remove emergency key2.

Inserting the emergency key # Press release knob1. # Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate

position or fully until it engages.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.

Replacing the SmartKey battery

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil

dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop.

68 Opening and closing

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 68).

# Press release knob2 down fully and slide cover1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery when doing this.

# Push in battery compartment3.

# Re-attach cover1 and push it until it engages.

Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot ing

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 72).

# Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified

specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced as well.

Opening and closing 69

Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle2. Locking pin1 pops up when the door is unlocked.

# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked.

# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han dle again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the

SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY

LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO

Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the

door handle is used are closed.

70 Opening and closing

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or2.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface2 until the closing process has been completed.

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 80).

If you open the tailgate from outside, it is auto matically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva

ted. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67).

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 72). # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

Opening and closing 71

# To activate: press and hold button2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna

mometer.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er's door using the emergency key.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 68). # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go

into opening1 in the cover. # Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as

straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle.

72 Opening and closing

# To unlock: turn the emergency key counter- clockwise to position1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly.

Cargo compartment Opening the tailgate

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space

behind and above the tailgate.

# Pull the tailgate handle.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 76).

Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate

# Pull remote operating switch1 for the tail gate.

# Press and hold thep button on the SmartKey.

Opening and closing 73

# If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately.

# If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the tailgate

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the tailgate downwards with the handle

and let it drop into the lock.

Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate

Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity

of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press thep button on the SmartKey.

R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

# Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

74 Opening and closing

# Switch on the power supply or the ignition. # Press remote operating switch1 for the

tailgate.

# Press closing button1 on the tailgate.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button2 on the tailgate.

If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.

# Press and hold thep button on the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot

below the bumper (/ page 76).

Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obsta cle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R Towards the end of the closing procedure

Opening and closing 75

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the

closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press thep button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch

on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening (/ page 73) and closing (/ page 74) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate

is opening or closing.

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a

kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten tional opening of the tailgate

R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 10 ft

76 Opening and closing

(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit uations.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

vehicle while performing the kicking move ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too

slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the

vehicle and back again.

1 Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or

snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros

thetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the

sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi

cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are

pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over

the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trail

ers or rear-mounted bicycle racks.

Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.

Opening and closing 77

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to approx imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at

the desired position. # Press and hold the closing button on the tail

gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored posi tion when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically.

Deactivating the opening angle limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tail

gate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

Requirements: R The rear seat backrest has been folded

forward. R The cargo compartment cover has been

removed.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 68).

# Insert emergency key2 into opening1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.

Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but

ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

78 Opening and closing

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but

ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the

rear passenger compartment side win dows.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched

on.

1 To close 2 To open

The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence. # To start automatic operation: press the

W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull theW button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can con tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

Opening and closing 79

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin

gers. R During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is

switched on.

% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.

# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature

is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

80 Opening and closing

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the button again.

% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 70).

Resolving problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force.

The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the

button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the

window guide. # Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor

responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor

responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjust ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. Possible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

Opening and closing 81

Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil dren

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the roller sun blind's range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free

of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from

the sliding sunroof.

82 Opening and closing

* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is installed

When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limi ted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can

be raised or opened when a roof lug gage rack is installed.

# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower

Use the3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind.

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be

raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed.

# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers

Opening and closing 83

ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active

In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin

gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce

dure. R During resetting.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind dur ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure

that no body parts are in the range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make

sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

84 Opening and closing

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the

sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.

# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards.

% By pushing or pulling the3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Auto matic lowering".

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun

blind.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the3 button little by little

until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the3 button little by little

until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

Opening and closing 85

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Roller sun blinds Extending the rear side window roller sun blinds

* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back

If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. # Always move the roller sun blind by

hand. # Do not drive with the roller sun blind

hooked in and side windows opened at the same time.

# Pull the roller sunblind out by tab1 and hook it onto brackets2 at the top of the window.

Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.

The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the tailgate is opened R When the hood is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered

(/ page 88)

86 Opening and closing

R When the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 87)

The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart

Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 143)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 269).

% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.

Deactivating the ATA # Press the, orp button on the

SmartKey.

or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart

Key in the stowage compartment (/ page 143)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the

SmartKey outside the vehicle.

Function of the tow-away alarm

% This function may not be available in all countries.

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol lowing components are closed: R Doors

Opening and closing 87

R Tailgate

The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva ted: R After pressing the orp button on

the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 143) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 170).

Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again.

R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm.

Function of the interior motion sensor

% This function may not be available in all countries.

When the interior motion sensor is armed, a vis ual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is armed automati cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The interior motion sensor is only armed when the following components are closed: R Doors R Tailgate

The interior motion sensor is automatically deac tivated: R After pressing the orp button on

the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 143) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi

cle interior R When the side window is open R When the panoramic sliding sunroof is open

88 Opening and closing

Arming/deactivating the interior motion sen sor

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-

sor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor.

Opening and closing 89

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye

level by the center of the head restraint R You can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru

ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con

ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the center of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area

90 Seats and stowing

Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat

is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Seats and stowing 91

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to exces sive strain on the grab handle

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize

the seating position or to assist in get ting in and out of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

92 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make

sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever3 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-aft position

Seats and stowing 93

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 102).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer

# Using buttons1 to4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

94 Seats and stowing

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press and hold release knob2.

# Push the head restraint backwards and let go of release knob2.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints

Removing

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for wards slightly (/ page 105).

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.

Seats and stowing 95

# Push release knob1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the

notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until it engages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settingsZ for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Selecting the massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High

Intensity on or off .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt.

Switching the seat heating on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu

96 Seats and stowing

ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu

ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8,

10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

Seats and stowing 97

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# To unlock: push release lever1 down as far as it will go.

# Adjust height2 and distance3 to the steering wheel.

# To lock: push release lever1 up as far as it will go.

# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

98 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 102).

Switching the steering wheel heating on/off

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow1 or 2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heating is switched on.

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heating switches off.

Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc

ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in

the sweep of the steering wheel or driv er's seat.

Seats and stowing 99

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steer

ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process will be stop ped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv er's seat will move back in the following situa tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's

door open R You open the driver's door with the ignition

switched off

% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards

only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition

on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition

switched on

The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off. R Vehicles with memory function: You call

up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: You save

the seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: Press one of the memory function memory position switches to stop the adjustment process.

100 Seats and stowing

Memory function Function of the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the

driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func tion

When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the

memory function, ensure that no body

parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel.

# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi ately release the memory function posi tion button. The adjustment process is stopped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display

Seats and stowing 101

Operating the memory function

Storing

# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press memory buttonV and then

press preset position4,T orU within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

# To call up: press and hold preset position button4,T orU until all the sys tems are in the stored position.

% When you release the preset position button, steering wheel, the seat and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The Head-up Display continues to be adjusted.

Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

102 Seats and stowing

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they

cannot be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 46).

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi

cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers

of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the

liquid is hot.

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.

* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the

rear seat armrest.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor

If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment

floor before a journey.

Seats and stowing 103

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully

engaged.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests. R Always use the partition net when transport

ing objects in the cargo compartment. R Always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and

distribute the load evenly.

104 Seats and stowing

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front storage compartments

1 Storage spaces in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a

multimedia and USB connection 3 Storage compartment in the front center

console with a USB port 4 Glove box

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

Requirements: R To fold the center seat backrest forwards:

the center seat backrest has been unlocked.

You can fold the center and outer seat backrests forwards separately. You can unlock the outer seat backrests electri cally. The buttons for unlocking are located in the cargo compartment.

Seats and stowing 105

# Insert seat belt tongue1 into seat belt strap holder2.

If necessary, when the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded forward, the front seat moves forward slightly to prevent a collision. # If necessary, fully insert the head restraints

in the rear seat backrest. # To fold the left and right seat backrests

forward: pull the right or left release handle 3.

# To fold the center seat backrest for wards: pull release catch5 of seat back rest4 forwards.

# Fold seat backrest4 forwards. # If necessary, reset the driver's or front

passenger seat.

106 Seats and stowing

Folding back the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap

ped when folding back the seat back rest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction dis play on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound.

Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator2 will be visible.

Locking the release catch of the center rear seat backrest

Requirements: R The left and center seat backrests are

engaged and joined together.

You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the cargo compart ment against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

Seats and stowing 107

# Fold the center and left seat backrests for wards.

# To lock or unlock: slide catch1 up or down.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr ests (cargo position) To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are ten degrees steeper (cargo position).

# Fold the seat backrest forwards (/ page 105).

# Move bracket1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Push seat backrest2 back to bracket1 until the backrest engages.

Cargo compartment cover

Extending/retracting the cargo compart ment cover

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The cargo compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads

against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.

* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart ment cover when loading the vehicle

The cargo compartment cover may be dam aged when the vehicle is being loaded.

108 Seats and stowing

# Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover is attached behind the seat backrest of the rear bench seat.

# To extend: pull cargo compartment cover1 back by grab handle2 and clip it into the holders on the left and right.

# To retract: unhook cargo compartment cover1 from the holders on the left and right and guide it forwards by grab handle2 until it is fully retracted.

Installing and removing the cargo compart ment cover

Requirements: R The cargo compartment cover is retracted.

Removing the cargo compartment cover

# Press in the end cap of cargo compartment cover1 on the right or left-hand side.

# Push cargo compartment cover1 into recess2 on the opposite side.

# Take cargo compartment cover1 out by pulling it upwards.

Installing the cargo compartment cover # Place cargo compartment cover1 in recess 2 on the left or right-hand side.

# Press in the end cap of cargo compartment cover1 on the opposite side and insert cargo compartment cover1 into other recess2.

# Slide the end cap outwards.

Attaching/removing the partitioning net

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads

against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by

Seats and stowing 109

using tie downs, even if you are using the partitioning net.

For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfill their protective functions. Replace damaged par titioning nets. Visit a qualified specialist work shop.

Example: partitioning net without cargo compart ment enlargement

# Extend and unfold the partitioning net. The joints on the top and bottom guide rods will audibly engage.

# To attach: attach guide rod1 on the head liner to holders2.

# Engage hooks3 in tie-down eyes4 on the left and right.

# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps until the partitioning net is tight.

# After driving a short distance, check the ten sion of the partitioning net and re-tension it if necessary.

110 Seats and stowing

# To remove: pull belt clamp5 upwards until the lashing straps are loose.

# Remove hooks3 from tie-down eyes4 on the left and right.

# Remove guide rod1 from the holders2. # To store: press the red button on the top

and bottom guide rods. # Collapse and roll up the partition net.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102).

1 Tie-down eyes

Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag

hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile

objects on the bag hooks.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them.

Seats and stowing 111

1 Bag hook

Overview of coat hooks on the tailgate

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 102).

1 Coat hook

The coat hooks are not suitable for hanging heavy objects as this can cause the tailgate to lower automatically. Use the coat hooks only for light objects such as jackets.

Attaching the parcel net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they

cannot be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

112 Seats and stowing

# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# Open cargo compartment floor1 , swing it upwards to an angle of around 45 and pull it out towards the rear.

# Put cargo compartment floor1 down on a clean surface.

# Stretch the parcel net across cargo compart ment floor1.

# Make sure that: R The parcel net is centered on cargo com

partment floor1 R Rubber band4 runs underneath installa

tions3 R Tab2 is facing forwards

# Slide cargo compartment floor1 into the cargo compartment horizontally until installa tions3 are seated in guides6 on both sides.

# Swing cargo compartment floor1 upwards to an angle of around 45 until installations 3 audibly engage.

# Ensure that rubber band4 runs underneath support5.

Seats and stowing 113

# Fold cargo compartment floor2 down. # Press cargo compartment floor2 down

until it engages.

# Swing the cargo compartment floor down and fold out rear section7.

# Position rubber band9 under fastener8. # Fold down rear section7 of cargo compart

ment floor1 and press it into the lock. % To avoid damaging the side trim in the cargo

compartment, keep sufficient distance from the side trims in the cargo compartment when removing or inserting the cargo com partment floor.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Notes on the snap-in module for the cargo compartment (telescopic rods) The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your cargo compartment for a variety of pur poses. The components are located in the stor age space under the cargo compartment floor.

1 Telescopic rod with mounting elements and holders

Installing a telescopic rod

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor

If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment

floor before a journey.

114 Seats and stowing

# Open the cargo compartment floor . # Attach holders1 in the desired position to

the side of the cargo compartment floor. # Close the cargo compartment floor.

# Turn mounting elements2 to =. # Insert mounting elements2 into the hold

ers1. # Extend telescopic rod3. # Insert telescopic rod3 into mounting ele

ments2. # Turn both mounting elements2 to&

until you feel them engage.

Locking and unlocking the cargo compart ment floor

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock wise2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise1 (to unlock).

Seats and stowing 115

Attaching a roof luggage rack

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load

and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to non- approved roof luggage racks

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# When a roof luggage rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes- Benz.

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof rail ing.

# Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Sockets Using the 12 V socket

Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W

(15 A) are permissible.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the storage compartment in the front cen

ter console R In the front passenger footwell R In the storage compartment in the center

console of the rear passenger compartment R In the cargo compartment

Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console

# Fold up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device.

116 Seats and stowing

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart ment open.

Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets

You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry

and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make

sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power

socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialized workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket

You could receive an electric shock in partic ular: R If you reach into the socket. R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects

into the socket.

# Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the

socket.

When the 115 V power socket is not in use, keep the flap closed.

Requirements: R The device is equipped with a suitable plug

which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.

R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (1.3 A) is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.

# Open flap3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V

socket1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp2 lights up.

Seats and stowing 117

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charg ing cable. The devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A) and when the ignition is switched on.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not

place any other objects in the mobile

phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor age compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage

devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart ment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile

phone stowage compartment.

118 Seats and stowing

The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed: R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec

tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni tion is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in

the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more efficient charging and con

nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile

phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are excluded.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com

# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.

% The mat can be removed by the tab for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Installing/removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure

Seats and stowing 119

that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Installing floor mats

# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.

# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.

Removing floor mats # Pull the floor mat off holders2. # Remove the floor mat.

120 Seats and stowing

Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating light switches

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off

When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi

cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the

right X or left W parking light.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

Light and visibility 121

The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 126).

Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or off

Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi

tion.

# Press the R button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.

122 Light and visibility

Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or

position. # Push the combination switch beyond the

point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching off high beam # Move the combination switch back to its

starting position.

High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction

of arrow3.

Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination

switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the

driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.

Light and visibility 123

Cornering light

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when

the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned

R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec tion.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes

trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.

cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic

conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions.

124 Light and visibility

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically.

The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the multifunction display.

Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina

tion switch.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Switch the function on or off.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time.

When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Light and visibility 125

Switching the surround lighting on/off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp

# To switch on/off: press button1 5 accordingly.

Control panel in the grab handle

1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on/off: press button1.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting

Setting the color # Select Color. # Set the desired color.

126 Light and visibility

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.

Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.

Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination.

Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation.

The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals.

Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome.

When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi ent lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate.

If changes are made to the temperature set ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.

When this function is active, the interior light ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off

1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent

Light and visibility 127

4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the corre sponding position1 -5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1. R Single wipe R Wipes with washer fluid

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

1 Wipes with washer fluid 2 Switches on intermittent wiping 3 g Switches off intermittent wiping 4 Wipes with washer fluid

# Turn switch1 to the correct position 1 -4. The symbol will appear on the instru ment cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold

the button on the combination switch

128 Light and visibility

for approximately three seconds (/ page 127). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.

Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind

shield.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.

Installing the wiper blades

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.

Light and visibility 129

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind shield.

# Switch on the ignition. # Press the button on the combination

switch (/ page 127). The wiper arms will return to the original position.

# Switch the ignition off.

Maintenance display

# Remove protective film1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly instal led wiper blades.

When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

% The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Removing the wiper blade # Switch the ignition off.

130 Light and visibility

# Fold wiper arm2 away from the rear win dow until it engages in the replacement posi tion.

# Unclip wiper blade1 from wiper arm2 and remove it in the direction of arrow3.

Installing the wiper blade

# Position wiper blade1 with both lugs3 on holder2 on the wiper arm.

# Push wiper blade1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder2.

# Make sure that wiper blade1 is seated cor rectly.

# Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Light and visibility 131

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul

der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

# Briefly press button1.

Resetting the outside mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or com

pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# Briefly press button1.

Adjusting the outside mirrors # Press button3 or4 to select the outside

mirror to be adjusted. # Use button2 to adjust the position of the

mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors # Vehicles without electrically folding out

side mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec trolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.

132 Light and visibility

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro

lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact

with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed,

immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing

which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function

The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 134). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans

mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than

9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror

on the driver's side.

Light and visibility 133

Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button2.

# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button1.

Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button2. # Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off.

134 Light and visibility

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control

An interior air filter in combination with the pre filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the air conditioning control panel

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate con trol with/without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, left 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3H Sets the airflow or switches off climate

control

4 Sets climate control to automatic (/ page 137)

5 Defrosts the windshield 6 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone

automatic climate control (without station ary heater):t calls up the air condition ing menu Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control (with stationary heater) or 3-zone automatic climate control (with/without stationary heater):! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches resid ual heat on/off (/ page 138)

7 Switches the rear window heater on/off

8 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control without stationary heater:0 switches synchronization on/off (/ page 137) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto matic climate control without stationary heater: switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 136)

Climate control 135

Vehicles with a stationary heater:& switches the stationary heater on/off

9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 138)

A Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control: switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 136) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto matic climate control:_ adjusts the air distribution, right

B w Sets the temperature, right

Rear operating unit in vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the airflow

Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using theH button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly. Other wise, the windows could fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the

lower edge of the media display.

136 Climate control

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu

(/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the button. # To switch to manual mode: press theH

or_ button.

Climate style

Climate style function The following climate styles are available in auto matic mode: R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and

draft-free setting

Adjusting the climate mode settings # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of

Seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style.

Setting the air distribution

# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136).

# Select a row of seats.

# To set the air distribution: select, P orO.

# Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec

ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. The climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the air condi tioning control panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the0 button.

The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate con trol zones are changed.

Climate control 137

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC.

Removing condensation from the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the or button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the

button.

Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press theg button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the

windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching the residual heat on or off

Requirements: R The vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. # To switch on: press the! button.

Residual heat is switched off automatically.

Activating/deactivating ionization

Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor less. # Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 136). # Select Air Quality. # Select IONIZATION.

Fragrance system

Setting the fragrance system

Requirements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla con located in the glove box. # Call up the climate control menu

(/ page 136). # Select Air Quality.

138 Climate control

# Select AIR FRESHENER. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is

reached.

Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra grance system

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per fume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid

perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact

with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.

# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. #

Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.

# To insert: slide flacon2 into the holder as far as it will go.

# To remove: pull out flacon2.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Climate control 139

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon # Unscrew cap1 of empty flacon2. # Fill flacon2 with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.

(15 ml). # Screw cap1 back onto flacon2.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa tion sheet attached to the flacon.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the

vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up

(/ page 288).

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: turn controller2 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

140 Climate control

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends

on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG Performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite

brake system R RACE START R AMG adaptive sport suspension system R AMG steering-wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or ignition

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.

Driving and parking 141

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button1 twice more.

# To switch on the ignition: press button1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.

The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within

15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tionj or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there

are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized.

# Shift the transmission to positionj ori. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- essential consumers and press button1 once.

142 Driving and parking

# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 143).

% You can switch off the engine while driving. By pressing button1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 146).

Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 on

symbol3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2 the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, SmartKey1

must be located in marked space2 on sym bol3 during the entire journey.

# Have SmartKey1checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and

leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi

cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or

the ignition with the start/stop button.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked.

Driving and parking 143

R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin

tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements: R Park positionj is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched

off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. You can stop the vehicle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the

smartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

144 Driving and parking

Breaking-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine

speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph

(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive programA

or;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat

est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to

brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at

full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past

the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and

accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are

either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimized acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation con ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you

could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa tion on ESP (/ page 174).

Pulling away with optimized acceleration

& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use optimized acceleration, indi vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles

are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in

(/ page 145). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway.

Driving and parking 145

R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration

When pulling away with optimized accelera tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized

acceleration.

# Engage theh drive position (/ page 159). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-

ahead position. # Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 156).

# Deactivate ESP (/ page 176). # Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with

your left foot. # With your right foot, fully depress the accel

erator pedal.

# After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera tion.

# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce dure is complete.

Ending optimized acceleration # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP. % After you pull away with optimized accelera

tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

146 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv

ing.

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,

the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur

faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around

the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco hol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or

allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Driving and parking 147

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over

revving range.

* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal

# Do not depress the brake pedal contin uously whilst driving.

# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter.

# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and

brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front

To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the next journey

148 Driving and parking

Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 316).

Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you must drive through water: R Observe the maximum permissible fording

depth (/ page 360). R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi

cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Notes on off-road driving

& WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines

If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll over.

# Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system.

Driving and parking 149

Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteris tics.

* NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles

The vehicle can be damaged by: R driving up onto high curbs or unpaved

roads. R quickly driving over obstacles such as

curbs, speed bumps or potholes. R heavy objects hitting the underbody or

chassis components.

# Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle.

# Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving.

# Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of pro hibition signs

Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. # Be sure to observe prohibition signs.

Checklist before driving off-road Check the following points before driving off- road: R Fuel level R Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maxi

mum level to ensure full gradeability (/ page 284). R Tire-change tool kit and spare wheel R Tires and wheels

Off-road driving Read this section before driving your vehicle off- road. Practice by driving over more gentle off- road terrain first. R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS

(/ page 173). R If necessary, select theF orG drive

program (vehicles with Off-road package) before driving off-road (/ page 156). R Select a vehicle level suitable for off-road ter

rain (/ page 208). To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance.

R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain. R Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not

easily visible and stay on marked routes. R Always keep the doors and windows closed

while the vehicle is in motion. R Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

and cruise control.

150 Driving and parking

R Adapt your driving style to the terrain. R Do not use the HOLD function on steep

downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces.

Driving on sand When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions: R Select theF drive program. R Select a higher vehicle level. R Shift to a lower gear. R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist

ance; the vehicle may otherwise dig itself in. R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi

ble. Make sure that the following prerequi sites are met: - The tire ruts are not too deep - The sand is firm enough - The ground clearance is sufficient

Fording

Also observe the following information when fording: R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: select

the highest possible vehicle level (/ page 208) R Drive no faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). R Observe the maximum permissible fording

depth (/ page 360). R Switch off automatic climate control

(/ page 137). R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you

drive. R Do not stop in the water and do not switch

off the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched off (/ page 153).

Driving in mountainous terrain Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain: R Observe the values of the approach/depar

ture angle and of the maximum gradient (/ page 360). R Avoid high engine speeds.

R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill. R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and

on long, steep downhill gradients. R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if nec

essary (/ page 188).

Checklist after driving off-road Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalan ces and therefore vibrations. R If theF orG drive program is selec

ted: select another drive program. R Deactivate DSR. R Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita

ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level. R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. R Check that the service brake is working nor

mally after a long downhill stretch.

Driving and parking 151

R Clean the following components every time after driving off-road: - License plate number - Headlamps and tail lamps - Tires, wheels and wheel arches - Underbody R After driving through sand, mud, water or

gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned: - Brake discs and brakepads - Tires and wheels - Axle joints

ECO start/stop function

Operation of the ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available

in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this.

The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans

mission positionh ori. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

system: You depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi

cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you

starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel

sharply or engage reverse gear.

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park positionj, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine is restarted automatically if: R You engage transmission positionh ork. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the

vehicle. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

system: - You release the brake pedal on a downhill

gradient and the vehicle does not roll. - The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient

and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).

ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi function display: R The symbol (green) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met.

152 Driving and parking

R Neither the nor symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, for exam ple, a stop sign.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the multifunction display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto matically switched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function

# Press button1. If indicator lamp2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated.

% Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console.

ECO display function

The ECO display summarizes your driving char acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol lowing: R Driving with particular care R Driving the vehicle in drive program; R Observing the gearshift recommendations

Driving and parking 153

The inner segment will light up and the outer segment will fill up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Moderate acceleration R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Consistent speed

The inner segment will not light up and the outer segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Fluctuations in speed

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three outer segments are completely fil

led simultaneously. R The ECO display lights up.

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus

fr. Start. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi function display of the on-board computer.

= Individual R individual settings

C Sport R continues to offer stability but with a sporty

setup R allows the sporty driver a more active driving

style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

A Comfort R comfortable and economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions

; Eco R particularly economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions

F Offroad R only available for vehicles with Off-road pack

age

154 Driving and parking

R intervenes later if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction R suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain,

such as dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces R not suitable for use on public roads

G Offroad+ R only available for vehicles with Off-road pack

age R intervenes later if there is oversteering or

understeering, thus improving traction R suitable for rough terrain, such as steep

and/or uneven terrain or for driving on rocky terrain R not suitable for use on public roads

Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive

- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP

R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension R Electric power steering

Notes on the roof load display

Certain drive programs and ESP settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof load. If one of these drive programs is set or selected,

the symbol is shown as a warning. When this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suitable for transporting a load on the roof. The following drive programs are affected: R Sport drive program R Sport + drive program R Individual drive program with the ESP set

ting Sport or Sport+

% The symbol is also shown in the following sit uations: R Within the themes if a corresponding

drive program is saved For more information on themes see . R Within the reset display if the previously

active drive program is unsuitable for the transport of a roof load For further information on the reset dis play, see (/ page 156).

Driving and parking 155

Selecting the drive program

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category.

Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously

active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is star ted theA drive program is set automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is activated auto matically. % This function must be activated for each user

profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed.

156 Driving and parking

% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine

% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Calling up the consumption indicator

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.

The current and average consumption is dis played.

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tionh ork, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position

h ork when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Driving and parking 157

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.

j Park position k Reverse gear

i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

% To shift into neutrali with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev eral seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i when the vehicle is at a standstill.

# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the

SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans mission remains in neutrali.

Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 164). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle

comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but

tonj. When the transmission position display showsj, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position displayj appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time untilj is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

158 Driving and parking

Park positionj is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle

is stationary and the transmission position is h ork. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle

is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position ish or k.

% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission positionh ork again.

Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal

R The driving speed

Manual gearshifting

Permanent setting

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# To activate/deactivate: press button1. Manual gearshifting is activated: transmis sion positionp and the current gear appear in the multifunction display. Manual gearshifting is deactivated: transmis sion positionh appears in the multifunction display.

Driving and parking 159

Temporary setting

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle1 or2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. Transmission positionp and the cur rent gear appear in the multifunction display.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission positionh appears in the multifunction display.

% To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program= using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, select thep setting for the transmission.

Gearshifting # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle1.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

# If gearshift recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

160 Driving and parking

Glide mode function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from

the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position displayh is

shown in green.

Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met: R Drive program; is selected.

R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep

uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer

hitch, and no bicycle rack installed. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake

pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program=.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation

Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum

effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Driving and parking 161

Refueling Refueling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation

of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,

the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or

take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

162 Driving and parking

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a gasoline engine

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise

fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines

drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# For vehicles with a gasoline engine, observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel.

Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.

1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table

Driving and parking 163

4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type

# Press the back area of fuel filler flap1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and

remove it. # Insert the fuel filler cap from above into

bracket2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the

tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle

switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap1.

Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the

front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to positionj.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable

material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

164 Driving and parking

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away.

* NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lower ing

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non- operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when

driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

# Engage transmission positionj in a station ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 158).

# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button1.

# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still

operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

Driving and parking 165

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener

When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within

the range of movement of the door.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea

ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.

safety standards

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.

# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin

uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro

gramming was successful. Additionally,

166 Driving and parking

synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not

included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the

garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects

are located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote

control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles

from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on remote control5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on

1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to

operate the door.

# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Driving and parking 167

Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.

Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 flashes green: release

buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (apply ing automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in positionj and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 169).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta

tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle

stationary.

This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

168 Driving and parking

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in positionh ork and

you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission positionj toh or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in positionk, the tail

gate must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: - You shift from transmission positionj.

- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

# Push handle1. The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously.

Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle1.

The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The redF (USA) or! (Can ada) indicator lamp lights up in the instru ment cluster.

Driving and parking 169

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been

damaged. R The force of the impact.

The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

story garage.

% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated.

% If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked

vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili tate the next engine start.

System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.

if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a SmartKey R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied

Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a

qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes about the high-volt age battery in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dan gers.

Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use)

Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears

in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup

ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavaila

ble.

170 Driving and parking

R The interior motion sensor and tow-away alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a

parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be

extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby

Mode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (park ing the vehicle for an extended period)

Requirements: R The engine is switched off.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be

aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

Driving and parking 171

% The radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.

1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera 4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi cle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cam eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors

or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.

# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 291). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.

Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a qualified specialist work shop.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 173) R Off-road ABS (/ page 173) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 174) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

(/ page 174) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 175) R ESP trailer stabilization (/ page 175) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

(/ page 177)

172 Driving and parking

R STEER CONTROL (/ page 177) R HOLD function (/ page 177) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 178) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 178) R Cruise control (/ page 180) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 199) R AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 207)

Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 182) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 186) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-

dependent) (/ page 187) R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

(/ page 188) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 194)

R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 190) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-

dependent) (/ page 192) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 192) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

with exit warning (/ page 202) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 205)

Parking Package R Rear view camera (/ page 212) R Surround view camera (/ page 215) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 218) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 223)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application

or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.

R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Functions of Off-road ABS

% Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select theF orG drive program.

Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving off- road: R The front wheels lock cyclically during brak

ing. R The braking distance is shortened due to the

digging-in effect.

System limits R Off-road ABS functions at speeds below

25 mph (40 km/h). R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer

may be restricted.

Driving and parking 173

Function of BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres

sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Functions of ESP

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) can monitor and improve driving stability and trac tion in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to

the situation.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster: R Driving stability will no longer be improved.

R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking.

If the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current

road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

is necessary when pulling away.

It can be advantageous to deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

174 Driving and parking

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 411) R Display messages (/ page 363)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if

they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel

or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP

The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP mode will be activated. You can select the

drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 156).

Function of ESP Crosswind Assist

ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ

ual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP trailer stabilization

& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with

a high center of gravity may tip over before ESP detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit

the current road and weather condi tions.

When driving with a trailer, ESP can stabilize your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side: R ESP trailer stabilization is active above

speeds of 40 mph (65 km/h). R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar

geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine

output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.

ESP trailer stabilization may be impaired or may not function if: R The trailer is not connected correctly or is

not detected properly by the vehicle.

Driving and parking 175

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP can only be activated/deactivated

using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# Select ESP. # Select On or Off.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# To deactivate ESP: press button1 until the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The OFF mes sage appears in the multifunction display.

# To activate ESP: briefly press button1. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

176 Driving and parking

Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,

especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid

System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or

in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened.

Driving and parking 177

R The engine is running or has been automati cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R The transmission is in positionh,k ori.

Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short

time quickly depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the dis

play disappears from the multifunction dis play.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted.

R The transmission is shifted to positionj. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission positionj and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the

power supply is insufficient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions: R The transmission is in positionh ork. R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

178 Driving and parking

You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The

driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last

break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga

tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx

imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road

surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor

nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.

Driving and parking 179

R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre

quently In active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu ing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the

driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist

Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area.

# Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.

Speed control cruise control

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

Displays on the multifunction display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but

not yet activated. Rh (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with theh dis play. % The segments between the stored speed and

the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly.

180 Driving and parking

Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause

the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.

Operating cruise control

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements: R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph

(20 km/h).

R The transmission is in positionh.

Operating cruise control # Press the rocker switches on the steering

wheel control panel up or down to the desired position.

Activating cruise control # SelectM with the right rocker switch.

Activating cruise control # Press rocker switch1 upM or down N. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

or # SelectJ with the left rocker switch.

The last stored speed is called up and main tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

Increasing or decreasing the stored speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or

Driving and parking 181

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch1 upM.

Adopting a detected speed # Activate cruise control. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis

played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control # SelectO with the left rocker switch.

Switching off cruise control # SelectN with the right rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP

intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)

% Plug-in hybrid: the adjustable set speed can be reduced due to the selected drive pro gram. Observe the relevant notes in the Sup plement.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if

the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in

urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical

182 Driving and parking

situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster

Assistance display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route

event (/ page 187) 2 Vehicle in front

3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis

play

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Rk (white): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set Rk (white vehicle, green speedometer):

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rk (green): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rr: Route-based speed adaptation active

(/ page 187).

The stored speed is shown along with the per manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the

green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas sive mode. The Suspended message appears in the multifunction display.

Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi function display on a single line.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.

Driving and parking 183

R If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving off- road or on sandy surfaces. R The windshield in the area of the camera is

dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep

uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is

considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no

longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita

ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take

evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when

changing lanes

184 Driving and parking

R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions

carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in positionh. R The driver's door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being

used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.

R DSR is deactivated. R Vehicles with Off-road package: theG

drive program is deactivated.

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.

Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

# Press theH button.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: press

rocker switch1 upM or downN, or selectJ with the left rocker switch.

or # To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch.

# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

Adopting a detected speed limit # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis

played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Driving and parking 185

# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.

# SelectJ with the left rocker switch. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and

firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# SelectO with the left rocker switch.

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Increasing or decreasing the speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed

and press rocker switch1 upM. Changing the specified distance to the vehi cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch up (). # To increase the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch down ().

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected

and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 200). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

186 Driving and parking

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 199). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h)

R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti ates a route event ahead in an economical, com fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 188).

The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll plazas R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic

Information )

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed

Driving and parking 187

adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off

before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the follow ing situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing

R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi vidual lanes, for example at toll plazas R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice R When towing a trailer

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula

ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations

# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted. R ECO Assist is active.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function.

When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 187).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Function of DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehi cle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradi

188 Driving and parking

ents, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in positionh,k ori, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 1 mph (2 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive at speeds greater than 28 mph (45 km/h) or select drive programC orB. The Off mes sage then appears in the multifunction display. The status indicator in the multifunction display disappears. You also hear a warning tone.

Notes on DSR

& WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces

If the driven speed and the target speed dif fer, the wheels may lose traction. # Take into account the road surface and

the difference between the driving

speed and target speed before activat ing DSR.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the down hill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tires, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required.

Activating or deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Requirements: R You are driving at a speed of 25 mph

(40 km/h) or lower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. Speed 24 mph message appears in the multifunction display. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select.

A status display appears in the multifunction display when the function is activated.

% When you switch to theF drive program, the function is automatically activated.

Changing the target speed

Driving and parking 189

# To increase/reduce the target speed: press rocker switch1 upM or down N to the point of resistance. The selected target speed increases or decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) and appears along with the symbol in the multifunc tion display.

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower

speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R (gray): activated and passive R (green): activated and active R (red): system limits detected R (white, red hands): "hands on the steer

ing wheel" prompt

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display.

% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must

expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 192).

190 Driving and parking

The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle. R Depending on the country: the driver

presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road.

R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are

present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting

out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections.

R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When towing a trailer. R When the tire pressure is too low.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten

tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.

Driving and parking 191

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Selecta Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears in the multifunc tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked.

R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with

multiple lanes in the direction of travel.

192 Driving and parking

R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph

(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in

the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. The message, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display.

If the assistance graphic is shown when chang ing lanes, an additional arrow appears in it point ing towards the adjacent lane (/ page 182). If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the message appears in the multifunction display. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depend ing on the situation.

& WARNING Risk of accident when chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that

the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and

keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 190).

Driving and parking 193

The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,

damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.

Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Select the function.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.

In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display1

194 Driving and parking

appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your

vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles, moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead

R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching crossing cyclists

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Driving and parking 195

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph

(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead

196 Driving and parking

R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or

with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision.

R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving

pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement

during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately

12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx imately 43 mph (70 km/h).

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva sive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.

Driving and parking 197

# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the warning lamp appears in the multifunction display. The system may be impaired or may not func tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer

ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has

been detected and displayed.

R If DSR is active. R In complex traffic situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into

the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot

be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.

due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc ess.

Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.

The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.

The distance warning function, the autono mous braking function and the Evasive Steer ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.

198 Driving and parking

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 171). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter mine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed

can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a

restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can

also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes

sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 363).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.

Driving and parking 199

R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs

on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs

outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance

Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating automatic adop tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Switch the function on or off.

The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter

Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 185).

Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display. # Switch the function on or off.

Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off.

Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.

Overview of the traffic light data service

& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data

The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation.

200 Driving and parking

# Keep the actual traffic situation con stantly in view when approaching a traf fic light and when changing lanes.

# Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru ment Display and Head-up Display.

The Instrument Display and Head-up Display (if available) show the traffic light and remaining time1 until the next green phase as a count down.

Example representation in the Instrument Display

The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green.

% The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection

into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection

% The direction arrows are displayed depend ing on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active

route guidance

If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed.

% Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwar ded to the provider of the traffic light infor mation service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not per manently saved.

If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the

Mercedes me Portal. R You have the service deactivated at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R You deactivate the service in the Assis-

tance menu in the multimedia system (/ page 202).

% This traffic light data service is only available in cities and regions countries.

The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia

system featuring navigation and a communi cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes

me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the

user account.

Driving and parking 201

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The traffic light data service is within the

scope of the navigation service.

The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traf fic light data service provider. The provider gath ers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal left or right and lane recom mendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys tems or components. Please note that the dis played data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa

tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The information in the Instrument Display is shown after selecting the display contents in the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. In addition, observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur

roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula

tions

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers.

System limits The display does not appear in the following sit uations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green

phase is less than ten seconds.

R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has

been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a con

struction site area or are being maintained. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired.

Switching the traffic light information dis play on or off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Switch Traffic Light Information onD or

offE.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to

202 Driving and parking

monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument clus ter: R (gray): system is activated but inopera

tive R (green): system is activated and opera

tional

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 171).

Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the

traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times.

Driving and parking 203

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants.

System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par ticular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of

their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehi cle and the electrical connection has been cor rectly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your

self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course- correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

204 Driving and parking

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan gers (/ page 202).

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electri

cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.

or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera (/ page 171). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

Driving and parking 205

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti vate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu ous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at

any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and

driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,

an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel

erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con

nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 207).

206 Driving and parking

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several

unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov

ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding.

R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.

Activate or deactivate the function.

AIR BODY CONTROL

AIR BODY CONTROL function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following com ponents and functions: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel

consumption

Driving and parking 207

R Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with

constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program Drive programA: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds above approximately

86 mph (138 km/h), the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately

50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

Drive program;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Drive programC: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Drive programB: R The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

Drive programF andG: R The suspension setting is suitable for off-

road terrain. R The vehicle is set to high level +1. R When driving at speeds above approximately

75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately

50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised.

Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program= (/ page 156).

% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been cor rectly established, the vehicle remains at normal level in drive programsA,;, C andB, irrespective of speed.

Differences between different vehicle levels compared to the normal level (0): R High level +2 (only vehicles with Off-road

package): approximately +2.0 in (+50 mm) R High level +1: approximately +1.2 in

(+30 mm) R Low level -1: approximately -0.6 in (-15 mm)

Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

208 Driving and parking

# Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the

vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload lug gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure

that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles

such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R Vehicles without Off-road package: the

vehicle must not be moving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R Vehicles with Off-road package:

- In drive programA,;,C or B: the vehicle must not be moving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

- In drive programF orG: the vehi cle must not be moving faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Driving and parking 209

Raising the vehicle

# Press button1. Indicator lamp2 lights up. Vehicles without Off-road package: the vehicle is set to high level +1. Vehicles with Off-road package:

R In drive programA,;,C or B: the vehicle is raised to high level +1. R In drive programF orG: the vehi

cle is raised to high level +2.

Your selection is saved. The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations: Vehicles without Off-road package: R When driving faster than 75 mph

(120 km/h). R When driving between 50 mph (80 km/h)

and 75 mph (120 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R After changing a drive program using the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

Vehicles with Off-road package: R In drive programA,;,C or B: - When driving faster than 75 mph

(120 km/h).

- When driving between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for approx imately three minutes.

R In drive programF orG: - When driving faster than 12 mph

(20 km/h): The vehicle is lowered to high level +1.

- When driving faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). or When driving between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for approx imately three minutes: The vehicle is lowered to the normal level (0).

R After changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.

210 Driving and parking

Lowering the vehicle # Press button1.

Indicator lamp2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive pro gram.

Lowering and raising the rear of the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the

vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements: R all vehicle doors are closed R there is no trailer coupled R there is no bicycle rack installed

R the battery is sufficiently charged (if neces sary, start the engine)

Lowering the rear of the vehicle

# Apply the electric parking brake. # Shift the transmission to positionj

(/ page 158).

# Pull switch1 in the cargo compartment trim briefly. Indicator lamp2 flashes until the vehicle has been lowered.

Lowering is interrupted in the following situa tions: R a vehicle door is opened. R switch1 is pulled again. R the vehicle is being driven faster than

1.2 mph (2 km/h).

% The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently active drive program if you drive at speeds greater than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the rear of the vehicle low ered. The Vehicle Rising Please Wait mes sage appears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp2 flashes twice and the rear of the vehicle does not lower: # Make sure that the requirements are met. % Lowering the rear of the vehicle allows the

vehicle to be loaded more easily. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle when doing this (/ page 102).

Driving and parking 211

Raising the rear of the vehicle # Check if the battery is sufficiently charged. If

necessary, start the engine. # Pull switch1 briefly.

Indicator lamp2 goes out. The vehicle will be raised to the currently selected level.

% The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently active drive program if you drive at speeds greater than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the rear of the vehicle low ered. The Vehicle Rising Please Wait mes sage appears in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle cannot be raised: # Ensure that the battery is sufficiently

charged; if necessary, start the engine. The raising process continues.

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the

vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing. % You can open the cover of the rear view cam

era manually (/ page 218). The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis played only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur

face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area

3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

212 Driving and parking

4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

Wide-angle view

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch

3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

Driving and parking 213

5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)

6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))

Wide-angle view

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch

3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

System failure If the rear view camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia sys tem.

System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 171).

% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

214 Driving and parking

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360 camera

Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and

parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

% You can open the cover of the rear view cam era manually (/ page 218).

Views of the surround view camera You can select from different views:

1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras

in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam

era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a

trailer hitch)

Driving and parking 215

Top view

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle

2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

3 Your vehicle from above

The color of the individual segments of warning display2 is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray.

Guide lines

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings1 are displayed in green.

216 Driving and parking

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch

3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports maneuvering procedures with a trailer.

Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out

2 Marker of the wheel contact points

System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the fol lowing message appears in the media display:

Driving and parking 217

System limits The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa tions: R The doors are open. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 171).

% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 291).

Calling up the view of the surround view camera using reverse gear # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia

system (/ page 215). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of

the rear view camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold thec button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.

Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after

some time or after an ignition cycle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in

218 Driving and parking

the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys tem, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater dis tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 223). % The Warn Early All Around setting is always

active at the rear of the vehicle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system

Vehicles without surround view camera

Vehicles with surround view camera

If you have not selected the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC1 appears in the multimedia sys tem at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn ing display is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

Driving and parking 219

R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less

System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.

persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, especially after driv ing off-road, taking care not to scratch or dam age them (/ page 171). Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Example: vehicles with surround view camera

When rear segments1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors

and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 291). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been

deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or when maneu vering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected

220 Driving and parking

obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in color in the display. The segment color changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 1.0 - 2.0 ft

(30 - 60 cm) R Red: less than approximately 1.0 ft (30 cm)

In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)

and rear (red)

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)

Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni

tion. R You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.

Driving and parking 221

System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from

the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.

# Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the button in the center console.

% Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 222).

If the indicator lamp in the button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi cator lamp is lit or the symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the

sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.

Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window

appears.

# Tap= in the media display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the symbol appears in the instru ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

222 Driving and parking

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur round view camera. When you are driving for wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. As soon as all requirements are met for search ing for parking spaces, the display appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the display appears in the multi function display. The arrows show on which side

of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake.

Driving and parking 223

R You engage transmission positionj. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the tailgate while driv

ing.

System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the bor ders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculat ing the parking procedure. In some circumstan ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active

Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more

than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached. R Directly after a tire change or when spare

tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.

after bottoming out on a curb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

224 Driving and parking

Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

button may also be located at a different position on the center console.

# Press button1.

The media display shows the view of Active Park ing Assist. Area2 displays detected parking spaces4 and vehicle path3. % Vehicle path3 shown on the media display

may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi

cle. # Select desired parking space4 and con

firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction (for

wards or reverse), and confirm. Vehicle path3 is shown, depending on selected parking space4 and the parking direction.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the parking procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:

Driving and parking 225

select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis played in green in the camera image.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,

safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce dure.

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active

Parking Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.

# Press button1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

226 Driving and parking

# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area2, select direction of travel3 Left or Right.

% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit3 to drive out of the parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto matically.

After the parking space has been exited, a warn ing tone and the Parking Assist Finished,

Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive

Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 222).

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations.

Driving and parking 227

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are inter

changed. R If an incorrect transmission position is

engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.

R If you shift the transmission position tok or h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.

3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistance function is

activated in the multimedia system.

System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available. % Also observe the system limits of Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 218).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehi

cles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any cross ing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the

L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. R Maneuvering assistance is activated

(/ page 228).

% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 202).

System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.

Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off.

228 Driving and parking

% The maneuvering assistant must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 227) and Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 228).

Trailer hitch Notes on trailer operation

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable ball neck

If you install an unsuitable ball neck, the trailer hitch and the rear axle may be overloa ded. This can significantly impair the driving char acteristics and the trailer may become loose. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Only install a ball neck that complies

with the permissible dimensions and is designed for the requirements of trailer operation.

# Do not modify the ball neck or the trailer hitch.

The values approved by the manufacturer can be found on the identification plates and in the "Technical data" section under "Trailer hitch" for the towing vehicle (/ page 361).

& WARNING Swerving of the vehicle/ trailer combination due to increased speed

You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination. The vehicle/trailer combination may even tip over. # Under no circumstances should you try

to straighten the vehicle/trailer combi nation by increasing the speed.

# Reduce your speed and do not counter steer.

# If necessary, apply the brakes.

* NOTE Damage to the engine as a result of overheating

# If you retrofit a trailer hitch, modifica tions to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.

When retrofitting a trailer hitch, observe the fastening points on the chassis.

Driving and parking 229

Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle docu ments. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. If the trailer coupling is detachable, it is essen tial to comply with the operating instructions of the trailer coupling manufacturer. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not connect the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer may become detached. Observe the following notes on the tongue weight: R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or

falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to

the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values: R Permissible towing capacity R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi

cle

R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehi cle R Permissible gross weight of the trailer R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

Ensure the following before starting a journey: R The tire pressure on the rear axle of the tow

ing vehicle is set for a maximum load R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera

tional R Vehicles without LED headlamps or MUL

TIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly

In the event of increased rear axle load, the vehi cle/trailer combination must not exceed a maxi mum speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 62 mph (100 km/h).

Attaching the ball neck

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to an incorrectly installed ball cou pling

If the ball coupling is not installed and engaged correctly, it may become detached during travel and endanger other road users. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Install and secure the ball coupling as

described in the ball coupling manufac turer's installation instructions.

# When the ball coupling has been instal led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly installed and secured ball coupling

If the ball coupling has not been correctly installed and secured, the trailer can become detached.

230 Driving and parking

# Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling manufac turer's installation instructions.

# When the ball coupling has been instal led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip.

Requirements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

Attaching the ball neck

# Remove cover1 from the ball neck mount in the direction of the arrow.

# Store cover1 so that it cannot move around.

# Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Coupling/uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle level being changed

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trap ped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addi tion, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that: # The doors or tailgate are not opened or

closed.

# You do not initiate the level control sys tem and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

# Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.

Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R The transmission is in positionj.

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi cle only if the following conditions are met: R The trailer is connected correctly. R The trailer lighting system is in working

order.

The functions of the following systems will be affected by a correctly connected trailer: R ESP trailer stabilization R Active Lane Keeping Assist R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist

Driving and parking 231

R Drive Away Assist R Cross Traffic Alert R Rear view camera R Surround view camera R AIR BODY CONTROL

Vehicles without a level control system: the ball head height will change depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

Coupling up a trailer

* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge

Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply

to charge the trailer battery.

Information about a suitable ball neck for Mercedes-Benz vehicles can be obtained from a

qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # Remove the cover cap from the ball neck

mount and store it in a safe place (/ page 230).

# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

# Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

% Accessories can be connected to the perma nent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni tion lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

* NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun

Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle. # Do not uncouple trailers with an

engaged overrun brake.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable

Vehicles with level control system: The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is disconnected. This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure that nobody is underneath

the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity

232 Driving and parking

of the wheel arches when you discon nect the trailer cable.

# Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

# Uncouple the trailer. # Place the cover on the ball neck mount.

Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 307) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 308).

Driving and parking 233

Notes on the instrument display and on- board computer

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction

If the Instrument Display has failed or mal functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes sages and warnings from specific systems on

the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

234 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Instrument display overview

1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

2 Outside temperature 3 Time

4 Area for additional values (example: tachom eter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date

5 Coolant temperature display During normal operation, the coolant tem perature display is permitted to rise to 248F (120C).

6 Selected drive program

7 Selected transmission position 8 Multifunction display (example: standard dis

play for a trip): assistance/telephone/navi gation/trip/media/radio/styles and dis plays/service/possible settings for Head-up Display

9 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor

Instrument Display and on-board computer 235

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel

1P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer

2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys

tem (/ page 240)

Voice Control System 5 To call up the home screen of the mul

timedia system 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in

the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior

Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the on-board computer.

The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Service R DriveAssist R Trip R Navigation R Radio R Media R Phone R Head-up Disp. R Vehicles with an instrument display in

the widescreen cockpit: Designs

% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

236 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.

% Press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func tion, an entry or a display: swipe up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To switch between displays: swipe up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.

Overview of displays on the multifunction display Displays on the multifunction display Active Parking Assist activated

(/ page 225) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

(/ page 222) Cruise control (/ page 180) DSR (/ page 188) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 182) Active Brake Assist (/ page 198) Active Steering Assist (/ page 190) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 205) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 192) ECO start/stop function (/ page 152) HOLD function (/ page 177) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 124)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 199).

Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Head-up Display projects the following into the driver's field of vision: R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driver assistance sys

tems R Some warning messages

Instrument Display and on-board computer 237

Display content

1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control)

When you receive a call, the6 Incoming Call message will appear on the Head-up Display. In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated.

System limits The visibility is influenced by the following condi tions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display off and on again.

Adjusting the Head-up Display settings on the on-board computer

On-board computer: 4 Head-up Disp.

1 Setting currently selected 2 Digital speedometer 3 Traffic Sign Assist 4 Navigation displays

The following can be adjusted for the Head-up Display: R Position R Brightness

238 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Display Content # To select a setting: swipe upwards or down

wards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down

wards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD.

The Head-up Display is activated.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 239

Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system

2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation,

radio/media, vehicle functions/system set tings and favorites/themes

4 Touchpad

5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or off

6 Switches the multimedia system or media display on or off

Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice

Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the

MBUX Interior Assistant.

% You can find further information about oper ation as well as about applications and serv ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

240 MBUX multimedia system

Home screen overview

1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen

2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call system is not available) 5 Mercedes me connect active

6 Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network,

network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time

8 Calls up the Notifications Center 9 Calls up an application using the symbol A Application and current information

B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address C Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and

FAVORITES

MBUX multimedia system 241

% If Mercedes me connect is active5, the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back- end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is coun try-dependent. If transmission of vehicle position is active 6, Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection informa tion. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

1 Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3G Pressing briefly: returns to the previ

ous display

Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any

direction.

Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters

by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left

or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters:

write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.

242 MBUX multimedia system

Using the touchpad

1G Returns to the previous display 2~ Calls up the audio control menu

Swiping to the left of right: selects the previ ous or next radio station/music track

3 Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad

# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a

character on the touchpad. # To open or close the Notifications Cen

ter: swipe down or up with two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two

fingers together or apart.

Calling up applications using buttons

1 % Calls up the telephone 2z Calls up navigation 3| Calls up radio or media 4y Calls up vehicle functions

5 Press briefly: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or theme or creates a new theme

# Alternatively, tap on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 241).

Functions of the Voice Control System

With the Voice Control System, various applica tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions

MBUX multimedia system 243

Starting the Voice Control System

# Press rocker switch1 up. or # Say "Hello Mercedes".

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam era's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser sys tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and

repairs carried out by a qualified spe cialist workshop.

This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses).

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel

may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off tempora rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or

scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R Recognition can be impaired by reflective

clothing, an adverse color of clothing or by accessories, for example.

244 MBUX multimedia system

R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera.

Keep the camera's field of vision clear. R The camera is not operational.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter.

The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:

Interaction area Interaction Description

In front of the media display or above the touchpad

Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a con trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required.

Above the center console Defined pose A favorite is called up with a defined pose.

Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.

Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat

By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.

MBUX multimedia system 245

Switching the reading light and search light and on or off

Requirements: R For the reading light: the function is availa

ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter

action area below the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is availa

ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter

action area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat

must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

Switching the reading light on and off

# Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger.

Switching the search light on and off

# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.

# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.

Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites

For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol lowing notes.

246 MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of

driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the

media display. or

# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me

connect can be found in the Digital Opera tor's Manual.

Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.

For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an appli cation.

MBUX multimedia system 247

Configuring profiles, themes and sugges tions

Multimedia system: 4 5f Profiles

Creating a new profile # SelectW Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm witha. # Select Continuer . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth and select Connect

Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile .

# Select Finish.

Selecting profile options # Select for a profile.

The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favorites

R Configuring suggestions

Configuring suggestions # Select for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow

Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug- gestions on or off.

# To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.

Creating new themes # Select. # Select THEMES. # SelectW Create Theme.

The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.

# Select Continuer. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and

store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continuer. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continuer. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and con

firm witha. # Select Save.

System settings Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make set tings in the following menus and control ele ments: R Display

- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness

248 MBUX multimedia system

- Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements

- Keyboard language and handwriting rec ognition

- Sensitivity of the Touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R Sound

- Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone - Voice amplification to the rear R Connectivity

- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R MBUX Remote Control

- Authorizing and de-authorizing devices R Time & date R Language R Units for distance

R Software updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset

Information on important system updates

Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required

for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update

by restarting the system

% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto matically.

The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available.

You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install

The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information

Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later

The system update can be downloaded man ually at a later time.

Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location

before starting the installation.

MBUX multimedia system 249

Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and

accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied.

If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down loaded system update is installed. The multime dia system cannot be operated while the down loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul

timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed.

R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ

depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur er's operating instructions.

# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.

Connecting using a security key # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device

to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.

# Confirm the entry with.

Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.

The multimedia system generates an eight- digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.

Connecting using a button # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network.

250 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options

on the device to be connected (see the man ufacturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.

The connection is established again.

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi- Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by

the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on

the device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external

device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be

connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Select Continue.

Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi

cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.

The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot.

MBUX multimedia system 251

# Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered.

Navigation Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic tion or wrong interpretation of the dis play

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic

situation.

# Avoid extended observation of the cam era image.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi tional information

The additional information from the augmen ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic

situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press thez button.

The map shows the vehicle's current posi tion. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid ance is active.

# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

252 MBUX multimedia system

Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des

tination entry options 2 To cancel active route guidance 3 To repeat a navigation announcement and

switch navigation announcements on or off

4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Inci- dent (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route List

POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass

5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and High- way Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced

MBUX multimedia system 253

Entering a destination

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

1 The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located

2 Entering a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry

5 a Confirms an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language

A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols

B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in2. The entries can

be made in any order.

254 MBUX multimedia system

The following entries can be made, for example: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name

# Select a search result in list3. # Calculate the route (/ page 255). % You can find further information about desti

nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov

ince1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1.

# Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list3. # Select the federal state or the province from

list3.

Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Select country indicator1. # Select the provider for the online service

from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results,

enter the destination in input line2. # Select the destination in the list.

The detailed view for the route is displayed.

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

1 No route yet. A route has been mapped.

# Select. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.

or # Select. # Select Set as Waypoint.

The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

MBUX multimedia system 255

or # Select Start New Route Guidance.

The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.

Selecting route settings # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration

with Dynamic Route Guidancer. # Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route.

Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

# Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera

symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneu ver and will show additional information.

# To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.

Displaying additional information in the cam era image # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers.

During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger

on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the

media display.

Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the

touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle

position: press\ briefly.

Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol

on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up.

Switching freeway information on/off # SelectZ.

256 MBUX multimedia system

# Switch Highway Information on or off.

Using services

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account

and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf fic Information # SelectZ.

# Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing

Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X- Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf- fic Incidents options. # Set the options.

If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.

Displaying weather information and other map contents # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-

TENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

MBUX multimedia system 257

Telephone Telephony

Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com

munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can

not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.

258 MBUX multimedia system

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 102) Bluetooth connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

R MAP (Message Access Profile) - The mobile phone message functions can

be used on the multimedia system.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functional ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man ufacturer's operating instructions.

Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception

station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged

into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

MBUX multimedia system 259

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone

2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)

3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone

4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search

Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime

dia system via Bluetooth.

260 MBUX multimedia system

R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi

media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.

- You can receive incoming calls and mes sages with the mobile phone in the back ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone

Searching for a mobile phone # Select. # Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pair ing. # Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:

- R Accept a call - k End Call - i Create Confer. Call

- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:

- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favorite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

- Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message

Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv ices. You can use the following services via the multi media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me

button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)

MBUX multimedia system 261

R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto matic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 263). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 264). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 269). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer

gency call system (/ page 269) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management. Forward ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on

location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto

matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 264)

In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect

service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

262 MBUX multimedia system

% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys tem.

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con

trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con

nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button1.

MBUX multimedia system 263

Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2 , press it

briefly. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least

one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 263). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general

information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle

R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 265).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system

Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover

age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that

vehicle data can be transferred automati cally.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5g

# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or

breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

264 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Call. R The vehicle data is sent automatically

(/ page 262). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

takes your call and organizes the break down and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,

an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either

be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select

Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Cus tomer Center takes your preferred appoint ment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap pears at a later time.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup

ported by the mobile phone network pro vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi

cient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call

MBUX multimedia system 265

R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv

ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys

tem.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication

platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are activated An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in

every country.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes

me apps updated.

266 MBUX multimedia system

You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes

me user account

R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the

web browser depending on availability

Web browser overview

The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back

4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

MBUX multimedia system 267

Overview of smartphone integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue tooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte gration is only possible with an Internet connec tion. The appropriate application must be down loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suita ble cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the

function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con trol box) R Apple CarPlay

R Android Auto

You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. You can end Smartphone Integration by discon necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting

the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system

Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net work coverage from the wireless service provid

268 MBUX multimedia system

ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol lows (/ page 271). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless

the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 269) or manually (/ page 270) Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation.

Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emergency call

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

MBUX multimedia system 269

The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig gers an emergency call automatically in the fol lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such

as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency

stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the

MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. The MercedesBenz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu

lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer gency call

# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press and hold the SOS but ton for at least one second (/ page 263).

# To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands .

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone.

270 MBUX multimedia system

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select~ on the multifunction steering

wheel. Depress the button for several sec onds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route

( (a few hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the

vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available

or not

R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR- MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter

mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established.

MBUX multimedia system 271

Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

272 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings Select to make settings.

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are availa ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with

the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio or video files

Authorizing a Bluetooth audio device for media playback

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system and audio equipment.

R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other

devices.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5

With Bluetooth audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia

system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.

Authorizing a new Bluetooth audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device.

Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.

# Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connec ted with the multimedia system.

MBUX multimedia system 273

Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth audio device from the

list. The connection is being established.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings

The setting options are country-dependent.

274 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

HD HD radio Select to switch the HD Radio function on or off. This function is not available in all countries.

8 Silent function Select to switch off the sound.

f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets.

4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.

MBUX multimedia system 275

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

Favorites Select during playback to save the station cur rently set as a favorite.

6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel

lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

276 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels

with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport

alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam

lessly

5 Playback control Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode.

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, dif ferent functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements:

MBUX multimedia system 277

R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis

sion free of interference.

% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.

The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Setting up satellite radio

Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider

has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas

ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z Options # Select Service Information.

The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub scription status.

# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions.

The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

% You can also have the satellite service acti vated online. To do so, please visit https://

www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Music and sport alerts

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts

Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of

matches in the Live program.

Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O.

Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert.

278 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

Activating sports information # Activate Activate Sports Alerts O.

Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog

window.

Deleting individual sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries.

All highlighted alerts are deleted.

Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries.

All alerts are deleted.

Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

Burmester surround sound system and Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester high-end 3D surround

sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

MBUX multimedia system 279

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long

periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 236).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Adhere to the prescribed service inter vals.

# Always have the prescribed mainte nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi

ate stops R mainly short-distance driving

280 Maintenance and care

R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long

periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions

and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on

the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 280).

Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood

is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there

is a person in the hood's range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot

gases. R You could come into contact with other

hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off.

Maintenance and care 281

Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never reach into the danger zone sur

rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition

system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Opening the hood

# To release the hood, pull on handle1.

282 Maintenance and care

# Push handle1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood until it opens automatically.

Closing the hood # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in

(20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.

# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the oil dipstick

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Requirements: R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the

engine oil level can be checked only with the on-board computer (/ page 284) .

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different locations. The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating tempera ture is five minutes.

Maintenance and care 283

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Pull oil dipstick1 out and wipe off. # Slowly slide oil dipstick1 into the guide

tube to the stop, and pull it out again after about three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between2

and3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at3 or

below.

R Oil level too high: oil level is above2. # If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt

(1 liter) of engine oil. # If the oil level is too high, drain off excess

engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the engine oil level using the on- board computer

Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level One of the following messages will appear on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement

of the oil level is not yet possible.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for

indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.

R Engine Oil Level Add 1.0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display

for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is above "max":

284 Maintenance and care

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil

level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil

level sensor is malfunctioning or not connec ted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood.

Refilling engine oil

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled

next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor

oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.

# Do not use additives.

* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Maintenance and care 285

# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

# Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it

engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 283).

Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening

the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres

sure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot tom quarter of the temperature display.

# Slowly turn cap1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.

286 Maintenance and care

# Continue turning cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to

marker bar2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to

0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar2.

# If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

% Further information on coolant (/ page 356)

Refilling the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Refill washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield

washer fluid (/ page 357)

Maintenance and care 287

Keeping the air-water duct free

# Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle

The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,

brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The surround view camera or the rear view

camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are

completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is

switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position

g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.

288 Maintenance and care

R In automatic car washes with conveyor sys tems: - Neutrali is engaged. - If you would like to leave the vehicle while

it is being washed, make sure the Smart Key is located in the vehicle. The park positionj is otherwise automatically engaged.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Notes on using a power washer

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail.

# Do not use a power washer with round- spray nozzles.

# Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in

(30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C). R Observe the information on the correct dis

tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions.

R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour ces and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using

a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.

Maintenance and care 289

% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 291).

Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care

Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by

rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp

cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matte finish R Only use care products approved for

Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the

latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final

hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish

ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint work care" (/ page 290). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild

cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora

tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped

vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils

are impaired by: - Sunlight

290 Maintenance and care

- Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.

Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative

foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil.

% Have work or repairs to decorative foils car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on care of vehicle parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi cle parts:

Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to

remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and

brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Maintenance and care 291

Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a

damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement

position (/ page 128). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the

wiper blades with a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.

Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild

cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear

bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 171).

R When using a power washer, maintain a mini mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Running boards R Use water and acid-free cleaning agents. R Do not clean the aluminum trim insert of the

running board with alkaline or acidic cleaning agents such as wheel cleaners. Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminum trim inserts could other wise be damaged.

Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia

system (/ page 218). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the

camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.

Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended

for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

Trailer hitch R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch

manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not clean the ball neck with a power

washer or solvent. R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for exam

ple, with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball

head.

% Before using trailers with anti-torsional cou pling, observe the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

292 Maintenance and care

# Do not use any care or cleaning prod ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol lowing notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F

(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down.

R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim.

Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp

cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,

polishes or waxes.

Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec

ommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp.

Maintenance and care 293

R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences.

Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a

dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

294 Maintenance and care

Emergency Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the storage com partments in the driver's and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out the safety vest bag by

the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the

safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in

the rear door storage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty

R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle # The warning triangle is located in the stow

age well under the cargo compartment floor.

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud2.

Breakdown assistance 295

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is in the cargo com partment in the left-hand storage net.

Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire

A flat tire severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning

notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).

In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos

sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 297). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair

the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 298). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you

can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 263). R All vehicles: change the wheel

(/ page 340).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.

296 Breakdown assistance

Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum

speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls

# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special

ist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure monitor ing system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency

mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand ard tire as a temporary measure.

Breakdown assistance 297

TIREFIT kit storage location

Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec ognize dangers. The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com partment floor, under a cover on the left-hand side.

Push retaining clamps1 on the cover down wards to release them and fold out the cover in the direction of arrow2.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres

sor (/ page 298). R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)

You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4F (-20C).

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the

tire (larger than damage previously men tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged

R After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not

298 Breakdown assistance

induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of any clothes contamina ted with tire sealant immediately.

# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which

have entered the tire.

# Affix part1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Affix part2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.

# Pull plug4 with the cable and hose5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose5 into flange6 of tire sealant bottle1 until the plug engages.

# Place tire sealant bottle1 head downwards into recess2 of the tire inflation compres sor.

Breakdown assistance 299

# Remove the valve cap from valve7 on the faulty tire.

# Screw filling hose8 onto valve7. # Insert plug4 into a 12 V socket in your

vehicle. # Switch on the ignition. # Switch on the tire inflation compressor using

On/Off switch3. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres sor during this phase!

# Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for

approximately 33 ft (10 m).

# Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

300 Breakdown assistance

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed

limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant

After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.

# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes

and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal ant cannot repair the tire in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

Breakdown assistance 301

# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button1 next to manometer2.

# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.

# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot tle.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 173) R Further information on ESP (/ page 174)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery.

302 Breakdown assistance

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor

oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Breakdown assistance 303

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat

tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage

When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage

When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting

There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of

the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

304 Breakdown assistance

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance

During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks

and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila

tion. # Do not lean over a battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before

charging it or performing starting assis tance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers.

All vehicles

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts

to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg

ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not

come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the

battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc

tions before charging the battery.

Breakdown assistance 305

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided

using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump

start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is in positionj. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are

switched off. R The hood is open.

Example: engine compartment

# Slide cover1 of positive clamp2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.

# Connect positive clamp2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always

begin with positive clamp2 on your own vehicle first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.

# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat tery and ground point3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start the charging process.

# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before discon necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:

306 Breakdown assistance

# First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.

# After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover1 of positive clamp2.

Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 302).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery

which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent

hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con

nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon

nected in the same way.

Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods

Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash

Breakdown assistance 307

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys tems.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

No

To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 307).

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started

R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni orj

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 310). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)

must not be exceeded.

308 Breakdown assistance

# A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may

swerve or even rollover.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of

the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 350).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionj.

# Install the towing eye (/ page 311). # Fasten the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 71).

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 88). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist

(/ page 198). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

# Release the electric parking brake.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys

tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri

cal system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can

move freely before towing the vehicle away.

Breakdown assistance 309

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 308).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in positionj in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift toi, provide the

on-board electrical system with power (/ page 306).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the

transporter.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.

# Do not exceed the maximum permissi ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur ing it incorrectly

# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

310 Breakdown assistance

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.

Towing eye storage location

Towing eye1 is under the cargo compartment floor.

Installing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the

Breakdown assistance 311

towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch. # Make sure that cover1 engages in the

bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye

When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or

tow start the vehicle.

Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci

fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the labeling. The fuse ratings and fur ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the cargo compartment (/ page 315).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

312 Breakdown assistance

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the

driver's side (/ page 313) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit

(/ page 314) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 314)

R Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 315)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 312).

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

# Turn retaining clip2 on cover1 a quarter- turn counter-clockwise.

# Fold cover1 up in the direction of the arrow.

Breakdown assistance 313

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws3 and remove fuse box lid 4 upwards.

Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor

rectly in lid4.

# Insert lid4 into the bracket at the back of the fuse box.

# Fold down lid4 of the fuse box and tighten screws3.

# Fold down cover1. # Turn retaining clip2 on cover1 a quarter-

turn clockwise. # Close the hood.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 312).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen

ter for further information.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 312).

# Open cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

314 Breakdown assistance

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cargo compartment

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 312). # Open the cargo compartment floor .

# Fold cover1 up in the direction of the arrow.

The fuse assignment diagram is on the side of the fuse box.

Breakdown assistance 315

Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread

Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires:in (4 mm)

# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off- road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 317).

R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the

tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).

Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx imately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

316 Wheels and tires

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect mounting of snow chains

If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front

wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear

wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum

permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do

not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains

are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 208).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 176). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tire pressure

Tires with either too low or too high a pres sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or

unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as

steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired

# Observe the recommended tire pres sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel: R monthly R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for

example when driving off-road

Wheels and tires 317

# Adjust the tire pressure where neces sary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can over heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear

R Increased fuel consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea ted pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be dam aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture

or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the

Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 324). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel

filler flap (/ page 319).

Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 330).

318 Wheels and tires

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Notes on trailer operation Always inflate the rear axle tires to the recom mended tire pressure on the tire pressure table for increased load.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example

data.

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Wheels and tires 319

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 331). R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 324) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 330)

Checking the tire pressure manually

# Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.

# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.

# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom

mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317)

R Tire pressure table (/ page 319) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 324)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor rect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

320 Wheels and tires

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute

and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea sons, including the installation of incompati ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 322).

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R Via display messages (/ page 403). R Via theh warning lamp in the instrument

cluster (/ page 424)

The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 322).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example

Wheels and tires 321

R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres sure monitoring system

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of

the individual wheels:

R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in

process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tire pressure with the recom mended tire pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 319). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 317).

% The values displayed in the on-board com puter may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indi cated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 317).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- ence Values? message is shown in the multi function display.

# To restart, press Touch Control on the left- hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellowh warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

322 Wheels and tires

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317)

Tire pressure loss warning system

Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrectly set tire pressure R Sudden pressure loss caused, for example,

by a foreign object penetrating the tire R Steady pressure loss in several tires

The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains

R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration R Driving with a very heavy or large trailer R Driving with a high load

The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317) R Display messages about the tires

(/ page 403)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 317).

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

Driver display: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.

The driver display shows the Run Flat Indicator Active Restart: Press Touch Control message. # To initiate a restart, press Touch Control on

the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The driver display shows the Tire Pressure Now OK? message.

# Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on

the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The driver display shows the Run Flat Indica- tor Restarted message.

Wheels and tires 323

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317)

Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac ard

& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa ded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the

permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding

the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to

the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

324 Wheels and tires

R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold

tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads

on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 350). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres

sure table (/ page 319).

Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load

(/ page 325) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

# (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five occupants 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa

ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula ted in step 4.

# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load care fully, you should still make sure that the maxi mum permissible gross weight and the maxi mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi cle identification plate.

Wheels and tires 325

# Have your loaded vehicle including driver, occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.

Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max

imum load (/ page 326)

R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 324) R Tire pressure table (/ page 319) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 350)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying

seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 324). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

326 Wheels and tires

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 1

Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

Wheels and tires 327

Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 328)

2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 329)

3 Maximum tire load (/ page 330) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 330)

5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 331) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 331) 8 Tire name

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Trans portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per formance factors:

1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times

328 Wheels and tires

as well on the government course as a tire gra ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction grade

& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade quate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and

drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

# Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance.

Temperature grade

& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres

sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the

tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

Wheels and tires 329

% The data shown in the image is example data.

The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu

facturer identification code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 336).

R Tire size: identifier3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be

used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example data.

Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv er's side (/ page 324).

Specifications for maximum tire pressure

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

330 Wheels and tires

Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 319).

Information on tire characteristics

% The data shown in the image is example data.

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires 331

First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US

manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu

facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with

high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per cent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above

149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and

Loading Information placard (/ page 324) R Maximum tire load (/ page 330) R Load index

Speed rating7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

332 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating

ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there

is no speed rating7, find out what the max imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7

are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear thei snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)

tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein

forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire

R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber- coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.

Wheels and tires 333

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac tory. The tire and information table contains the rec ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max imum permissible load and the maximum per missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight

of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if

334 Wheels and tires

these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours

without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 335

Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tires

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with

those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model

When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer

tain AMG tires)

Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle.

336 Wheels and tires

Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus ing permanent damage to the tire. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use

i M+S- tires.

Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk

Wheels and tires 337

of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your

driving style accordingly. # Usei M+S tires at outside temper

atures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur

pose.

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in

certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one

axle (left and right).

It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring

system: All installed wheels must be equip ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45F (7C) use win

ter tires or all-season tires markedi M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same

tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for

the first 60 miles (100 km).

R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea

ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 324) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 331) R Tire pressure table (/ page 319) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 345)

338 Wheels and tires

Notes on rotating wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tires are of the same dimen sions.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the

tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty

book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 340).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease

or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench

Wheels and tires 339

R Alignment bolt

The tire-change tool kit is located under the cargo compartment floor. % Depending on the model, the tire-change

tool kit may be located in other positions under the cargo compartment floor.

1 Jack 2 Ratchet for jack

3 Lug wrench 4 Folding chock 5 Alignment bolt 6 Socket wrench for ratchet

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements: R The required tire-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift into positionj. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the

normal vehicle level (/ page 208).

# Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 340).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 341).

Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

(/ page 340).

Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub

cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.

340 Wheels and tires

# Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminum hub cap

# To remove: position socket2 from the tire- change tool kit on hub cap1.

# Position wheel wrench3 on socket2. # Using wheel wrench3, turn hub cap1

counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in

reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft

(25 Nm).

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 340).

Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has

been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and

holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the

vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release

the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail

gate.

Wheels and tires 341

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com pletely.

Position of jack support points

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for

jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

342 Wheels and tires

# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup port point1.

# Turn ratchet3 clockwise until support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn ratchet3 until the tire is raised a maxi mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 343).

Removing a wheel

Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 341).

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.

# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com pletely.

# Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Wheels and tires 343

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 336).

For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the

alignment bolt and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 336).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes- Benz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screw ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the

wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 344).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed

(/ page 343).

# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock wise.

344 Wheels and tires

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 to the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.

# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn ing system (/ page 323). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 322). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency

spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size replaced

Wheels and tires 345

at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

% The emergency spare wheel is fastened in the cargo compartment under the cargo compartment floor.

Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency

spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an

emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel

with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six

years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure loss warning sys tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the

system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 317) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 324) R Tire pressure table (/ page 319) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 336)

Inflating the emergency spare wheel

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tire inflation compressor. # Remove the sticker with the label 50 mph

(80 km/h) from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Remove the tire inflation compressor from the storage space under the trunk floor (/ page 298).

346 Wheels and tires

# Pull filler hose2 and plug4 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

# Insert plug8 of filler hose2 in the socket on the tire inflation compressor and then turn it until plug8 engages.

# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer gency spare wheel.

# Screw union nut3 of filler hose2 onto the valve.

# Make sure on and off switch5 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.

# Insert plug4 in a socket in your vehicle. R Cigarette lighter socket

R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Operator's Manual

# Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni tion lock.

# Press on and off switch5 on the tire infla tion compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on manometer6.

# Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure.

% The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

# When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch5 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

# Turn the SmartKey to positiong in the igni tion lock.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the speci fied pressure, press pressure release valve button7 until the correct tire pressure has been reached.

# Unscrew union nut3 of filler hose2 from the valve.

# Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.

# Store filler hose2 and plug4 in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor hous ing.

# Store the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 347

Notes on technical data

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

* NOTE Plug-in hybrid

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle electronics Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical

and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic ular:

R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor

rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior

antenna installed at a qualified special ist workshop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out

put power in these frequency bands.

348 Technical data

# Only use approved antenna positions.

1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.

On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

(100 W)

4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz

(30 W)

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

(50 W)

Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz

(10 W)

70 cm frequency band 400 - 460 MHz

(35 W)

Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)

(10 W)

Technical data 349

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis

sion output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies

in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol lowing frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G

Radio operating permits for vehicle compo nents Manufacturer information about wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Radio operating permits" in the Digital Opera

tor's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

350 Technical data

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN below right-hand front seat

1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering

Additional plates

1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 Plate with information about emissions test

ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California

3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield

Technical data 351

Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health

Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con

tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution due to disposing of operating fluids in a non-environmentally responsi ble manner

Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.

DEF R lubricants

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi

ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid

R Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating flu ids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids by entering the designation - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R at a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

352 Technical data

# Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor

oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R Unleaded premium grade gasoline R E85 fuel R A mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium

grade gasoline

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with gaso line engines Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

Technical data 353

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 162). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON.

* NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline

Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with

unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre mium grade gasoline.

# Do not drive at the maximum design speed.

# Avoid sudden acceleration engine speeds over 3000 rpm.

Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen

ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes- Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi cated on the tank.

354 Technical data

Tank content and reserve fuel

Capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 17.4 gal (66.0 liters)

Model of which reserve fuel

All models 1.8 gal (7.0 liters)

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the

prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

Gasoline engine Engine oil specifica tions

All models 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71*

* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Technical data 355

Replacement amount

Model Replacement amount

All models 6.3 US qt (6.0 liters)

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys tem

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the

specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before

adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze

from component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only use coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection.

Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids 310.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

356 Technical data

# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection

down to approximately -35F (-37C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49F (-45C))

Coolant capacity

Model Capacity

All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters)

Notes on windshield washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid

Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam age the plastic surface of the exterior light ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which

is also suitable for use on plastic surfa ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter Fit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windshield washer flu ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 352).

Technical data 357

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger ant

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R1234yf refrigerant.

* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com pressor oil

# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be car ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig

erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop

358 Technical data

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil

Model Refrigerant

All models 22.2 0.4 oz (630 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 2.8 0.4 oz (80 10 g)

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment

Height when opened

Model 1 Height when opened

2 Head room

All models 84.5 in (2146 mm)

78.4 in (1992 mm)

Vehicle dimensions

All models

Vehicle length 183.4 in (4658 mm)

Vehicle width including out side mirrors

82.5 in (2096 mm)

Vehicle height 65.5 in (1664 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)

Turning radius 38.71 ft (11.80 m)

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the speci fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the

curb weight and reduce the payload.

Technical data 359

Roof load

Model Maximum roof load

All models 165.4 lb (75 kg)

Off-road driving

Fording depth

* NOTE Damage caused by water when fording

Water can enter the engine compartment and vehicle interior in the following cases: R The maximum permissible fording depth

when driving through standing water is exceeded R A bow wave forms during fording R Water accumulates during fording of flow

ing water

# Do not exceed the maximum permissi ble fording depth and drive slowly through the water.

The specified value indicates the maximum per missible fording depth for vehicles that are ready to drive and for slow driving through standing water. Driving through flowing water reduces the per missible fording depth due to the accumulation of water. Observe the notes on off-road driving and ford ing (/ page 149).

Model 1 Fording depth

All models 11.8 in (30 cm)

Angle of approach/departure The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are ready to drive. On vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, loads up to the maximum permissible load have no influ ence on the approach/departure angle. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter rain (/ page 149).

Model 1 Front 2 Rear

All models 29.6 23.6

360 Technical data

Maximum gradient climbing ability The vehicle's gradient climbing ability depends on the weight distribution in the vehicle, the ter rain conditions and the road surface conditions. The specified value applies in the following cases: R The vehicle is ready to drive R The road surface conditions and thus trac

tion are good

A gradient climbing ability of 100% corresponds to an incline of 45. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter rain (/ page 149). Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Model Maximum gra dient climbing

ability

All models

Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi cle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.

Towing capacity

The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start- off gradeability of 12%)

Model Towing capacity, braked

GLC 300

GLC 300 4MATIC

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity, unbraked

GLC 300

GLC 300 4MATIC

Maximal tongue weight and load capacity

* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

Technical data 361

# The tongue weight must not be below 110.2 lbs (50 kg).

# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Tongue weight

Model Maximum tongue weight

GLC 300

GLC 300 4MATIC

Load capacity

Model Maximum load

All models

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Axle load

Model Axle load

GLC 300

GLC 300 4MATIC

362 Technical data

Display messages Introduction

Information about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif fer from the symbols on the multifunction dis play. The multifunction display shows high-prior ity display messages in red. Certain display mes sages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the symbol to show further infor

mation on the media display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing theP back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip

ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the back buttonP.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 38).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 38).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (Example)

* The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 38).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag

The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual

* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag

If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 48). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is

located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 48). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Obtain a New Key

* Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 68).

Key Not Detected (white display message)

* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey

(/ page 143).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Not Detected (red dis play message)

* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 143).

Don't Forget Your Key

* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual

* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 143).

368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Check Left Low Beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting

diodes in the light are faulty.

: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative

* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Switch On Headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.

: Switch Off Lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.

: Intell. Light System Inoper- ative

* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 124). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart

Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V

battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.

? * The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A * The tailgate is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.

# Close the tailgate.

_ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Check Washer Fluid

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 287).

374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 secs. or press 3 times.

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 142).

+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 286). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off

* The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

* The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

8 Fuel Level Low

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

8 Gas Cap Loose

* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi- cle is Stationary

* It is possible to select the park positionj only if the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. # Change the transmission position.

Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission positionk. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionk.

Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected. # Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.

N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away

* Neutrali has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission positionh ork.

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # When transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans

mission position.

378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling

* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir

cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 169).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 169). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 169). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 169).

To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Can ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To apply: # Switch the ignition off.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 169).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 169).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

* The redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 169). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 169).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

* The redF (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Off

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 177).

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 178). # If necessary, take a break.

- - - mph

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 181).

Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 180).

- - - mph

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 185).

386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Suspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 182).

Off

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 185).

Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 182). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

Active Distance Assist Inop- erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now Available

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 185).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Inoperative

* The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Not in the Current Drive Program

* The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. # Change the drive program (/ page 154).

Max. Speed 25 mph

* The maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly.

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 190). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision.

388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 192). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 190). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle safely and clean the windshield.

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Camera View Restricted See Opera- tor's Manual

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 202). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine. # If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is especially dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal

functioning.

Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Not Avail- able When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 202). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man- ual

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 205). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: The camera view may be limited by the windshield. # Drive on.

Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph

* AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and

set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 208). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

Lowering

* The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons: R You have selected a different drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.

394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Vehicle Rising

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Drive More Slowly

* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 19 mph

(30 km/h).

Max. Speed 12 mph

* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Parking Assist Maneuvering Assistance Restricted See Operator's Manual

* The Parking Assist maneuvering assistance is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 291). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care

fully.

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care

fully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully.

398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 291). # Restart the engine.

400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Mercedes me connect

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Oper- ator's Manual

* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 27). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# See Operator's Manual

* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running

* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir

cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # If the display goes out: you can drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive

* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors

* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

h Check Tires

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 317) and the tires.

h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure

* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 322).

h Warning Tire Malfunction

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire

R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi

ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.

Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 296).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires.

Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tire pressure loss warning system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tire Pressure Soon * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 317) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 323).

Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 323).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Run Flat Indicator Inopera- tive

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refueling.

Add engine oil (/ page 285). Notes on engine oil (/ page 355).

408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 285).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 355).

5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 285). # Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 355).

5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine

* Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey.

Instrument display (standard) Widescreen cockpit instrument display

Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the example shown.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411

Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 413) Seat belt (/ page 413) Power steering (/ page 414) Coolant temperature (/ page 415) ; Check Engine (/ page 415) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 415) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca

tion indicator (/ page 415) F USA: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 418) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 418) ! Electric parking brake (yellow)

(/ page 418) USA: Recuperative Brake System

(/ page 418) J Canada: brakes (yellow)

(/ page 418) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 418) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 418)

L Distance warning (/ page 421) ! ABS (/ page 421) ESP (/ page 421) ESP OFF (/ page 421) h Tire pressure monitoring system

(/ page 424) T Parking lamps (/ page 121) L Low beam (/ page 121) K High beam (/ page 122) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 122) R Rear fog lamp (/ page 121)

412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Restraint system warning lamp

* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 38).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt warning lamp flashes

* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 42). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Seat belt warning lamp lights up

*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 42).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Coolant warning lamp

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue

driving under any circumstances. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 286). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

; Engine diagnosis warning lamp

* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Electrical malfunction warn ing lamp

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (USA only)

! Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (Canada only)

! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)

J Brakes warning lamp (yel low) (Canada only)

*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellowJ brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)

J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

L Warning lamp for distance warning function

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 194).

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP warning lamp flashes

* The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 174). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

ESP warning lamp lights up

* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ESP OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated

ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 174).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures.

424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425

1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC

Function................................................. 161 12 V battery

see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket

see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket

see Socket (115 V) 360 Camera

Function................................................. 215 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. 218 Selecting a view..................................... 218

A A/C function

Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 137 Switching on/off (control panel)........... 136

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 173 Acceleration

see Kickdown

Accident and Breakdown Manage ment

Mercedes me connect........................... 262 Acoustic locking verification signal

Activating/deactivating........................... 67 Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake application.................................. 204 Function................................................ 202 System limitations................................. 202 Trailer operation.................................... 204

Active Brake Assist Function/notes...................................... 194 Setting................................................... 198

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 192 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 192 Calling up a speed................................. 185 Function................................................ 182 Increasing/decreasing speed................ 185 Requirements........................................ 185 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 187 Steering wheel buttons.......................... 185 Storing a speed..................................... 185 Switching off/deactivating.................... 185

Switching on/activating........................ 185 System limitations................................. 182

Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 192 Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating......................... 194 Function................................................ 192

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 207 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 207 Function................................................ 205 System limits......................................... 205 Trailer operation.................................... 205

Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space......................... 226 Function................................................ 223 Parking.................................................. 225 System limitations................................. 223

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist Display.................................................. 186 Function................................................ 186

426 Index

Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 192 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 192 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 192 Function................................................ 190 System limits......................................... 190

Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................. 124 Switching on/off................................... 125

Additives Engine oil.............................................. 355 Fuel....................................................... 354

Additives (engine oil) see Additives

Additives (fuel) see Fuel

ADS PLUS damping system see AIR BODY CONTROL

After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS

Air bag Reduced protection................................. 46

AIR BODY CONTROL Setting................................................... 208 Suspension............................................ 207

Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 136

Air distribution Setting................................................... 135 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 137

Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer

Air inlet see Air-water duct

Air pressure see Tire pressure

Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL

Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 140 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 140

Air vents see Air vents

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

Air-recirculation mode.............................. 138 Air-water duct

Keeping free.......................................... 288 Airbag

Activation................................................ 38 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 43 Installation locations............................... 43 Knee airbag............................................. 43 Overview................................................. 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 48 Protection................................................ 44 Side airbag.............................................. 43 Window curtain airbag............................. 43

Airflow Setting................................................... 135

Alarm see Panic alarm

Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

All-wheel drive see 4MATIC

Index 427

Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system).................. 126

Android Auto see Smartphone integration

Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 65

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains see Snow chains

Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.............................................. 86

Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration

Assistance systems see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods............... 281

Displaying the service due date............ 280 Function/notes..................................... 280 Regular maintenance work.................... 280 Special service requirements................ 280

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor......................................... 89 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm... 88 Deactivating the alarm............................ 87 Function.................................................. 86 Function of the interior motion sensor.... 88 The tow-away alarm function................... 87

ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 178 Setting................................................... 180 System limitations................................. 178

Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Automatic driving lights........................... 122 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 152 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 152 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff

Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff................ 46 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 48

Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff

see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating......................... 134

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 157 Drive program display............................ 156 Drive programs...................................... 154 DYNAMIC SELECT switch...................... 154 Engaging drive position......................... 159 Engaging neutral.................................... 158 Engaging park position.......................... 158

428 Index

Engaging reverse gear........................... 158 Kickdown............................................... 160 Manual gearshifting............................... 159 Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 159 Transmission position display................ 157 Transmission positions.......................... 157

Axle load Towing a trailer...................................... 362

B Bag hook..................................................... 111 Ball neck

Installing................................................ 230 BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 174 Battery

SmartKey................................................ 68 Battery

see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle)

Charging................................................ 306 Charging (Remote Online)..................... 144 Notes.................................................... 302

Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 304 Replacing............................................... 307 Starting assistance................................ 306

Belt see Seat belt

Bicycle rack Load capacity........................................ 361

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 205 Function................................................ 202 System limitations................................. 202

Blower see Climate control

Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Notes.................................................... 356

Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 177

Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 173

Active Brake Assist................................ 194 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 174 Driving tips............................................ 146 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 177 HOLD function....................................... 177 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 146 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs...................................................... 145 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 145

Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown Changing a wheel.................................. 340 Overview of the help functions................ 18 Roadside Assistance................................ 24 Tow-starting........................................... 312 Towing away.......................................... 308 Transporting the vehicle........................ 310

Breakdown see Flat tire

Buttons Steering wheel...................................... 236

Index 429

C Calls

Mercedes me........................................ 263 Camera

see 360 Camera see Rear view camera

Car key see SmartKey

Car wash see Care

Car wash (care)......................................... 288 Car-to-X-Communication

Displaying hazard warnings................... 257 Care

Air-water duct........................................ 288 Automatic car wash............................... 288 Carpet................................................... 292 Decorative foil....................................... 290 Display.................................................. 292 Exterior lighting..................................... 291 Headliner............................................... 292 Matte finish........................................... 290 Paintwork.............................................. 290

Plastic trim............................................ 292 Power washer........................................ 289 Real wood/trim elements..................... 292 Rear view camera.................................. 291 Running boards..................................... 291 Seat belt................................................ 292 Seat cover............................................. 292 Sensors................................................. 291 Steering wheel...................................... 292 Surround view camera........................... 291 Tailpipes................................................ 291 Trailer hitch............................................ 291 Washing by hand................................... 289 Wheels/rims......................................... 291 Windows................................................ 291 Wiper blades.......................................... 291

Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting............................. 108 Removing/installing.............................. 109

Cargo compartment floor Locking/unlocking................................. 115

Cargo tie-down rings.................................. 111 Carpet (Care)............................................. 292 Change of address....................................... 24

Change of ownership.................................. 24 Changing a wheel

Preparation........................................... 340 Raising the vehicle................................. 341

Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Changing gears Manually................................................ 159

Changing hub caps................................... 340 Charging

Battery (vehicle).................................... 306 USB port................................................ 118

Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) Setting................................................... 208

Child safety lock Rear doors............................................... 63 Rear side windows................................... 65

Child seat Attaching (notes)..................................... 56 Basic instructions.................................... 52 Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 62 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 57 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 53

430 Index

Securing on the front passenger seat...... 62 Securing on the rear seat........................ 60 Top Tether............................................... 59

Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 53 Basic instructions.................................... 52 Special seat belt retractor....................... 56

Chock Storage location.................................... 339

Chock see Chock

Cleaning see Care

Climate control Activating/deactivating......................... 136 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)......................... 136 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)...... 137 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (control panel)............ 137 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 138

Air-recirculation mode........................... 138 Automatic control.................................. 137 Calling up the air conditioning menu..... 136 Climate style function............................ 137 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control...................................... 135 Control panel for dual-zone auto matic climate control............................. 135 Defrosting the windshield...................... 135 Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... 359 Front air vents....................................... 140 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra grance system)...................................... 139 Ionization............................................... 138 Note...................................................... 135 Rear air vents........................................ 140 Refrigerant............................................ 357 Refrigerant filling capacity..................... 359 Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 138 Residual heat......................................... 138 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 136 Setting the air distribution..................... 135 Setting the airflow................................. 135 Setting the climate style........................ 137 Setting the fragrance system................. 138

Setting the vehicle interior tempera ture........................................................ 135 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 135 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 80

Climate style Function................................................ 137 Setting................................................... 137

Coat hook................................................... 112 Coat hook on the tailgate.......................... 112 Cockpit

Overview................................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol

see ATTENTION ASSIST Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 170 Combination switch.................................. 122 Computer

see On-board computer Connecting the parcel net......................... 112 Consumption indicator

Calling up.............................................. 157

Index 431

Convenience closing feature...................... 80 Convenience opening.................................. 80 Coolant (engine)

Capacity................................................ 357 Check level............................................ 286 Notes.................................................... 356

Cooling see Climate control

Copyrights License.................................................... 36 Trademarks............................................. 36

Cornering light........................................... 124 Cross Traffic Alert..................................... 228 Crosswind Assist

Function/notes...................................... 175 Cruise control

Activating............................................... 181 Buttons.................................................. 181 Calling up a speed................................. 181 Deactivating........................................... 181 Function................................................ 180 Requirements:....................................... 181 Selecting................................................ 181

Setting a speed...................................... 181 Storing a speed...................................... 181 System limitations................................. 180

Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 30 Customer Relations Department............... 30

D Dashboard

see Cockpit Data acquisition

Vehicle..................................................... 31 Data protection rights

Data storage............................................ 34 Data storage

Data protection rights............................. 34 Electronic control units............................ 31 Online services........................................ 34 Vehicle..................................................... 31

Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights Switching on/off................................... 125

Deactivating the alarm (ATA)...................... 87

Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop

Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components.................. 26

Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 290 Definitions (tires and loading)................. 333 Destination entry

Entering a POI or address...................... 254 Detecting inattentiveness

see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection.............................. 27 Digital Operator's Manual.......................... 20 Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever

Engaging drive position......................... 159 Engaging neutral.................................... 158 Engaging park position.......................... 158 Engaging park position automatically.... 158 Engaging reverse gear........................... 158 Function................................................ 157

Display (care)............................................. 292

432 Index

Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... 241

Display (multimedia system) Operating.............................................. 242

Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display.... 237

Display message Calling up (on-board computer)............. 363 Notes.................................................... 363

Display messages - - - mph....................................... 386 - - - mph....................................... 386 # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 401 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 370 ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 385 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 386 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................ 369 $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 384

# Check Brake Pads See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 385 + Check Coolant Level See Oper ator's Manual........................................ 375 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu eling...................................................... 408 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 409 : Check Left Low Beam (exam ple)........................................................ 369 h Check Tires.................................. 404 Check Washer Fluid...................... 374 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off...................................... 375 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 396 Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 398 Don't Forget Your Key.................. 368 Drive More Slowly........................ 395

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured............................................... 411 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi cle Turn Engine Off................................ 409 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine.................................. 410 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level.......... 409 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)............................... 364 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 377 8 Gas Cap Loose............................. 377 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 397 Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 398 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 399 G Inoperative................................... 401 Inoperative................................... 388 : Intell. Light System Inoperative.... 370

Index 433

Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 368 Key Not Detected (white dis play message)........................................ 367 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal function Service Required (Example)..... 364 Lowering...................................... 394 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 393 : Malfunction See Operators Manual.................................................. 369 Max. Speed 12 mph..................... 395 Max. Speed 25 mph..................... 388 Not in the Current Drive Pro gram...................................................... 388 Obtain a New Key......................... 367 Off................................................ 387 Off................................................ 385 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 380

h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 405 F Please Release Parking Brake...... 383 _ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)................................. 374 Replace Key Battery..................... 367 # See Operator's Manual................ 402 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ 364 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. 372 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual...... 373 # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run ning....................................................... 403 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 402 Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low....... 394 Suspended................................... 387 : Switch Off Lights.......................... 370 : Switch On Headlamps.................. 370

F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake.................................. 384 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting................ 372 Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ 395 Vehicle Rising............................... 395 h Warning Tire Malfunction............. 405 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 404 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 391 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... 392 Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 392 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur rently Limited See Operator's Manual... 399 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi ted See Operator's Manual................... 400 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 387

434 Index

Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ 387 Active Distance Assist Now Available.... 387 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man ual......................................................... 393 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 392 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera tive........................................................ 392 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 396 Active Parking Assist Maneuvering Assistance Restricted See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 396 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer gency Stops........................................... 389 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 388

Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... 389 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man ual......................................................... 371 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 371 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative... 371 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'................. 377 Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'..................... 378 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction................ 379 Beginning Emergency Stop.................... 389 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila ble See Operator's Manual.................... 391 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative................. 391 Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man ual......................................................... 391 Check Tire Pressure Soon..................... 407 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator.................................. 407

Cruise Control Inoperative.................... 386 Cruise Control Off................................. 386 Decrease Speed.................................... 406 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away..... 378 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ 365 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ 365 Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc tioning................................................... 372 Mercedes me connect Services Limi ted See Operator's Manual.................... 401 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away...................................................... 378 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta tionary................................................... 377 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 368

Index 435

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 366 Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual.................................................. 400 Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 379 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative............... 408 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer............................................ 378 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling..................... 379 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ 403 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............. 403 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors...................................... 404 Tires Overheated................................... 406 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... 378

To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 secs. or press 3 times........................... 375 Traffic Sign Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual......... 390 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail able See Operator's Manual.................. 390 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative............... 390 Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 379

Display on the windshield see Head-up Display

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Child safety lock (rear doors).................. 63 Locking (emergency key)......................... 72 Opening (from inside).............................. 70 Unlocking (emergency key)..................... 72 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 70

Door control panel....................................... 16

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 329 Downhill driving assistance

see DSR Drawbar

see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 146 Drive Away Assist...................................... 227 Drive Away Assist

see Protection against collision Drive position

Inserting................................................ 159 Drive program display............................... 156 Drive programs

see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat

see Seat Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 173 Active Brake Assist................................ 194 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 174 Cameras................................................ 171

436 Index

EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 177 ESP Crosswind Assist.......................... 175 ESP trailer stabilization........................ 175 Off-road ABS.......................................... 173 Overview................................................ 172 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 171 Responsibility........................................ 171 STEER CONTROL................................... 177

Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see DSR

see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Traffic Sign Assist

Driving tips Drinking and driving.............................. 146 General driving tips............................... 146 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 145 Optimized acceleration.......................... 145

Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

DSR Activating/deactivating......................... 189 Changing the target speed.................... 189 Function................................................ 188 Notes..................................................... 189

Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT Configuring drive program I................... 156 Displaying engine data.......................... 156 Displaying vehicle data.......................... 156 Drive program display............................ 156 Drive programs...................................... 154

Function................................................ 154 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 156 Selecting the drive program.................. 156

E E10............................................................. 353 Easy entry feature

Function/notes....................................... 99 Easy exit feature

Function/notes....................................... 99 EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Installing/removing the telescopic rod.. 114 Notes..................................................... 114

EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)

Function/notes..................................... 177 ECO display

Function................................................ 153 ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.......................... 152 Automatic engine stop........................... 152 Method of operation.............................. 152 Switching off/on................................... 153

Index 437

Electric parking brake Applying automatically.......................... 168 Applying or releasing manually.............. 169 Emergency braking................................ 169 Releasing automatically......................... 169

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 296 Overview of the help functions................ 18 Reflective safety vest............................ 295 Removing the warning triangle.............. 295 Setting up the warning triangle............. 295

Emergency braking................................... 169 Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency engine start............................ 312 Emergency key

Locking a door......................................... 72 Unlocking a door..................................... 72

Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 143

Emergency spare wheel Inflating................................................. 346 Notes.................................................... 345

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 38

Engine ECO start/stop function........................ 152 Engine number...................................... 350 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 143 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 144 Starting (start/stop button).................. 142 Starting assistance................................ 306 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 164

Engine data Displaying.............................................. 156

Engine number.......................................... 350 Engine oil

Additives............................................... 355 Capacity................................................ 355 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick................................................. 283 Checking the oil level using the on- board computer..................................... 284 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 355

Quality................................................... 355 Topping up............................................. 285

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP Crosswind Assist................................... 175 Trailer stabilization................................. 175

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... 176 Function/notes...................................... 174

Exterior lighting see Lights

Exterior lighting (care).............................. 291 Exterior mirrors

Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 132 Automatic mirror folding function.......... 134 Folding in/out........................................ 131 Operating the memory function............ 102 Parking position..................................... 133 Setting................................................... 131

438 Index

F Fatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ 296 Flacon

Inserting/removing............................... 139 Flat tire

Changing a wheel.................................. 340 MOExtended tires.................................. 297 Notes.................................................... 296 TIREFIT kit............................................. 298

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Floor mats.................................................. 119 Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 171 Fragrance

see Perfume atomizer Free software.............................................. 36 Frequencies

Two-way radio....................................... 349 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 43

Front passenger seat see Seat

Fuel Additives............................................... 354 E10........................................................ 353 Fuel reserve.......................................... 355 Gasoline................................................ 353 Quality (gasoline).................................. 353 Refueling............................................... 162 Sulfur content....................................... 353 Tank content......................................... 355

Function seat see Door control panel

Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 312 Dashboard fuse box............................... 314 Fuse assignment diagram...................... 312 Fuse box in the cargo compartment...... 315 Fuse box in the engine compartment..... 313 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well........................................................ 314 Notes..................................................... 312

Fuses see Fuses

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory............................. 168 Opening or closing the door.................. 167 Programming buttons............................ 165 Resolving problems............................... 167 Synchronizing the rolling code............... 167

Gasoline..................................................... 353 Gearshift recommendation...................... 160 Genuine parts.............................................. 22 Glide mode................................................. 161

H Handbrake

see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual).......... 316 HANDS-FREE ACCESS.................................. 76 Hazard warning lights............................... 123 Hazardous substances

Information.............................................. 25 Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically)................. 94

Index 439

Rear (installing/removing)....................... 95 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting)............................................... 95

Head-up Display Adjusting display elements (on-board computer)............................................. 238 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer)............................................. 238 Function................................................ 237 Menu (on-board computer)................... 238 Operating the memory function............ 102 Setting the position (on-board com puter).................................................... 238 Switching on/off................................... 239

Headlamps see Automatic driving lights

Headliner (care)......................................... 292 Heating

see Climate control Help call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam

Activating/deactivating......................... 122

High-beam flasher..................................... 122 High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 124 Hill start assist.......................................... 178 HOLD function

Function/notes..................................... 177 Switching on/off................................... 177

Home screen (media display) Overview................................................ 241

Hood Opening/closing.................................... 281

I Identification plate

Engine................................................... 350 Refrigerant............................................ 357 Vehicle.................................................. 350

Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 141

Ignition key see SmartKey

Immobilizer.................................................. 86

Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps

Individual drive program Configuring............................................ 156 Selecting............................................... 156

Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors

Inspection see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster Function/notes............................. 234, 235

Instrument Display Function/notes..................................... 235 Instrument cluster................................... 10 Warning/indicator lamps....................... 411

Instrument Display and on-board computer

Function/notes..................................... 234 Intelligent Light System

Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 124 Cornering light....................................... 124

Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 126

440 Index

Ambient lighting.................................... 126 Reading lamp......................................... 126 Switch-off delay time............................. 127

Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating........................... 89 Function.................................................. 88

Internet radio see TuneIn

Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 138

iPhone see Smartphone integration

J Jack

Storage location.................................... 339 Jump-start connection

General notes........................................ 304

K KEYLESS-GO

Locking the vehicle.................................. 70

Problem................................................... 71 Unlocking setting..................................... 67 Unlocking the vehicle.............................. 70

Kickdown Using..................................................... 160

Knee airbag.................................................. 43

L Labeling (tires)

see Tire labeling Lamp

see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display)

see Warning/indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic)

see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor

Installing.................................................. 57 Level control system

see AIR BODY CONTROL

Light switch Overview................................................ 121

Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights

Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 124 Automatic driving lights......................... 122 Combination switch............................... 122 Cornering light....................................... 124 Hazard warning lights............................ 123 High beam............................................. 122 High-beam flasher................................. 122 Light switch........................................... 121 Low-beam headlamps............................ 121 Parking lights......................................... 121 Rear fog lamp........................................ 121 Responsibility for lighting systems......... 121 Setting the exterior lighting switch- off delay time........................................ 125 Standing lights....................................... 121 Switching the surround lighting on/ off.......................................................... 126 Turn signal light..................................... 122

Index 441

Limited Warranty Vehicle..................................................... 31

Limiting the opening angle (tailgate)........ 78 Live Traffic Information

Switching the traffic information dis play on................................................... 257

Load index (tires)....................................... 331 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 331 Loading

Bag hook................................................ 111 Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 111 Coat hook.............................................. 112 Definitions............................................. 333 Notes..................................................... 102 Roof luggage rack.................................. 116

Loading see EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Loading guidelines.................................... 102 Loading information table........................ 324 Loads

Securing................................................ 102

Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature............................... 71 Emergency key........................................ 72 KEYLESS-GO........................................... 70 Opening the tailgate................................ 73 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................ 70

Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off................................... 121

Lowering the vehicle Rear of the vehicle................................. 211

Lubricant additives see Additives

Luggage Parcel net............................................... 112 Securing................................................ 102

Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way)............................. 94

M Maintenance

Vehicle..................................................... 24 Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction

Restraint system..................................... 38 Malfunction message

see Display message Maneuvering assistance

Activating/deactivating......................... 228 Cross Traffic Alert................................. 228 Drive Away Assist.................................. 227

Map Displaying online map contents............. 257 Displaying weather information............. 257 Moving.................................................. 256 Selecting the map orientation............... 256 Setting the map scale............................ 256 Switching freeway information on/off... 256

Massage program Resetting the settings.............................. 96

442 Index

Massage programs Selecting the front seats......................... 96

Massage settings Resetting................................................. 96

Matte finish (cleaning instructions)........ 290 Maximum load rating................................ 330 Maximum permissible load

Calculation example.............................. 326 Determining.......................................... 325

Maximum tire pressure............................ 330 MBUX Interior Assistant

Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free........................................... 246 Switching the search light for the driver on/off......................................... 246

MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) Overview............................................... 244

MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 171 Configuring drive program I................... 156 Notes..................................................... 240 Overview............................................... 240

Setting route-based speed adaptation... 188 Standby mode function......................... 170

Mechanical key Inserting/removing................................. 68 Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 78

Media Overview of the functions and sym bols....................................................... 272

Media mode Connecting Bluetooth audio equip ment...................................................... 273

Medical aids................................................. 29 Memory function

Function................................................. 101 Head-up Display Calling up stored settings................................................. 102 Head-up Display Storing settings....... 102 Operating.............................................. 102 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings................................................. 102 Outside mirrors Storing settings........ 102 Seat Calling up stored settings.......... 102 Seat Storing settings.......................... 102

Steering wheel Calling up saved settings................................................. 102 Steering wheel Saving settings........... 102

Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display.................................... 238 Overview............................................... 236

Mercedes me app Information............................................ 266

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment.......... 265 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... 264 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 264 Information............................................ 264 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel............................................... 263 Transferred data.................................... 265

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage ment...................................................... 262 Information............................................ 261 Transferred data.................................... 263

Index 443

Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 141

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... 269 Information............................................ 268 Information on data transfer.................. 271 Manual emergency call.......................... 270 Overview............................................... 269

Mercedes-Benz Link see Smartphone integration

Message (multifunction display) see Display message

Message memory...................................... 363 Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone

see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Model series see Vehicle identification plate

MOExtended tires...................................... 297 Multifunction display

Overview of the displays........................ 237

Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons.............................. 236

Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel

Multimedia system Activating/deactivating DSR................. 189 Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 170

Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad

N Navigation

Notes.................................................... 252 Overview............................................... 253 Showing/hiding the menu..................... 252 Switching on......................................... 252

Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route

Neutral Inserting................................................ 158

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle......... 145

O Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

Off-road driving......................................... 149 Off-road driving

see Off-road driving Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

Displaying the service due date............ 280

444 Index

Head-up Display menu.......................... 238 Multifunction display............................. 237 Operating.............................................. 236 Overview of menus................................ 236

On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection

Online services Data storage............................................ 34

Open-source software................................ 36 Opening the tailgate using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 76 Operating fluids

Additives (fuel)...................................... 354 Brake fluid............................................. 356 Coolant (engine).................................... 356 Engine oil.............................................. 355 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 353 Notes.................................................... 352 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 357 Windshield washer fluid......................... 357

Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 26 Information.............................................. 25

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 23

Operator's Manual (digital)........................ 20 Optimized acceleration

Activating.............................................. 145 Overhead control panel

Overview................................................. 14

P Paint code.................................................. 350 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 290 Panic alarm

Activating/deactivating........................... 67 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

see Sliding sunroof Park position

Inserting................................................ 158 Selecting automatically......................... 158

Parking see Electric parking brake

Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating.............................................. 222 Adjusting warning tones........................ 223 Function................................................. 218 Side impact protection.......................... 220 Switching off......................................... 222 System limitations................................. 218

Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist

Parking brake see Electric parking brake

Parking for an extended period................ 170 Parking lights............................................. 121 Parking position

Exterior mirrors..................................... 133 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear.......................................... 134

Index 445

Partitioning net Attaching............................................... 109

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Payload Calculation example.............................. 326 Determining the maximum.................... 325

Perfume see Perfume atomizer

Perfume atomizer Inserting/removing the flacon............... 139 Setting................................................... 138

Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer

Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 171 Standby mode function......................... 170

Permitted towing methods....................... 307 Pets in the vehicle....................................... 65 Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 292 Power supply

Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 141

Power washer (care)................................. 289 Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Function................................................... 51 PRE-SAFE Sound.................................... 51 Reversing measures................................. 51

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus)

Function.................................................. 52 Reversing measures................................. 51

Preventative occupant protection sys tem

see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)

Profile Creating a new profile........................... 248 Notes..................................................... 246 Selecting profile options........................ 248

Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 22

Protection against collision...................... 227 Pulling away

see Driving tips

Q QR code

Rescue card............................................. 31 Qualified specialist workshop................... 28

R Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage................................................. 171 Radio

Overview of the functions and sym bols........................................................ 274

Radio operating permits........................... 350 Rain-closing feature

Sliding sunroof........................................ 84 Raising the vehicle

Rear of the vehicle................................. 211

446 Index

Reading lamp see Interior lighting

Reading light Switching on/off with hand move ments.................................................... 246

Real wood (Care)....................................... 292 Rear doors (child safety lock).................... 63 Rear fog lamp

Switching on/off................................... 122 Rear of the vehicle

Lowering................................................ 211 Raising................................................... 211

Rear seat see Seat

Rear view camera Care....................................................... 291 Function................................................. 212 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera)................................................. 218

Rear window Changing the wiper blade...................... 130

Rear window heater.................................. 135

Rear window wipers Activating/deactivating......................... 128

Reflective safety vest............................... 295 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)

Notes..................................................... 357 Refueling

Refueling the vehicle............................. 162 Remote Online

Charging the starter battery.................. 144 Cooling or heating the vehicle interior... 143 Starting the vehicle............................... 144

Reporting safety defects............................ 30 Rescue card................................................. 31 Reserve

Fuel....................................................... 355 Residual heat............................................. 138 Restraint system

Basic instructions for children................. 52 Function in an accident........................... 38 Functionality............................................ 37 Malfunction............................................. 38 Protection................................................ 37 Reduced protection................................. 37

Self-test................................................... 37 Warning lamp.......................................... 37

Reverse gear Inserting................................................ 158

Rims (care)................................................. 291 Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............. 24 Roll away protection

see HOLD function Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/slid ing panel................................................. 82 Side windows.......................................... 86

Rollover crash.............................................. 29 Roof load.................................................... 359 Roof load display

Information............................................ 155 Roof luggage rack

Loading.................................................. 116 Securing................................................. 116

Route Calculating............................................ 255 Selecting options.................................. 255

Index 447

Route guidance with augmented real ity

Activating.............................................. 255 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 255

Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 187 Setting................................................... 188

Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 297

Running boards (care)............................... 291

S Safety systems

see Driving safety system Satellite radio

Logging in.............................................. 278 Setting music and sport alerts.............. 278

Search light Switching on/off with hand move ments.................................................... 246

Seat 4-way lumbar support.............................. 94

Adjusting (electrically)............................. 93 Adjusting (mechanically and electri cally)........................................................ 91 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear passenger compartment).............. 108 Backrest (rear) locking.......................... 107 Configuring the settings.......................... 96 Correct driver's seat position.................. 90 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back............................... 107 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards..... 105 Operating the memory function............ 102 Resetting the settings.............................. 96 Setting options........................................ 16

Seat belt Care...................................................... 292 Protection................................................ 39

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 43 Function.................................................. 42

Seat belt warning see Seat belts

Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 43 Adjusting the height................................ 42 Center rear seat (releasing)..................... 41 Fastening................................................. 42 Reduced protection................................. 40 Releasing................................................. 43 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 42 Warning lamp.......................................... 43

Seat cover (Care)....................................... 292 Seat heating

Activating/deactivating........................... 96 Seat ventilation

Activating/deactivating........................... 97 Selecting a gear

see Changing gears Selector lever

see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test

Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff.............................................. 48

Sensors (care)............................................ 291

448 Index

Service center see Qualified specialist workshop

Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS

Setting a speed see Cruise control

Setting the map scale see Map

Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation.................... 160

Side airbag................................................... 43 Side impact protection............................. 220 Side windows

Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment......................... 65 Closing.................................................... 78 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 80 Convenience closing feature................... 80 Convenience opening.............................. 80 Opening................................................... 78 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 80

Problem................................................... 81 Roller sunblind........................................ 86

Size designation (tires)............................. 331 Sliding sunroof

Automatic features.................................. 84 Closing.................................................... 82 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 80 Opening................................................... 82 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 80 Problem................................................... 85 Rain-closing feature................................. 84

SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal.......... 67 Battery.................................................... 68 Energy consumption................................ 67 Features.................................................. 66 Key ring attachment................................ 68 Mechanical key........................................ 68 Overview................................................. 66 Panic alarm.............................................. 67 Problem................................................... 69 Unlocking setting..................................... 67

SmartKey functions Deactivating............................................ 67

Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Smartphone integration Overview............................................... 268

Snow chains............................................... 317 Socket (12 V)

Front center console.............................. 116 Trunk/cargo compartment.................... 116

Socket (115 V) Rear passenger compartment................ 117

Software update System updates..................................... 249

Sound PRE-SAFE Sound.................................... 51 Wheels and tires.................................... 316

Sound menu Functions overview................................ 279

Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Special seat belt retractor.......................... 56 Specialist workshop.................................... 28

Index 449

Speed index (tires).................................... 331 Sport Utility Vehicle.................................... 29 Standby mode

Activating/deactivating......................... 171 Function................................................ 170

Standing lights........................................... 121 Start-off assist

see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button

Parking the vehicle................................ 164 Starting the vehicle............................... 142 Switching on the power supply or ignition................................................... 141

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)..................... 144

Starting assistance see Jump-start connection

Starting the engine see Vehicle

Starting-off aid see Hill start assist

STEER CONTROL Function/notes..................................... 177

Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)............................. 99 Adjusting (manually)................................ 98 Buttons.................................................. 236 Care...................................................... 292 Operating the memory function............ 102 Steering wheel heater............................. 99

Steering wheel heater Switching on/off..................................... 99

Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 159 Storage areas

see Storage space Storage compartments

see Storage space Storage space

Armrest................................................. 105 Center console...................................... 105 Door...................................................... 105 Glove box.............................................. 105 USB ports.............................................. 105

Stowage areas see Loading

Stowage compartments see Loading

Suggestions Configuring............................................ 248

Sulfur content........................................... 353 Surround lighting

Switching on/off................................... 126 Surround View

see 360 Camera Surround view camera

Care....................................................... 291 Suspension

Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)................................... 208

Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL

Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. 125 Interior................................................... 127

450 Index

Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 138 Switching on/off (control panel)........... 137

System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... 248

T Tailgate

Closing.................................................... 74 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 76 Limiting the opening angle...................... 78 Opening................................................... 73 Opening dimensions.............................. 359 Unlocking (mechanical key)..................... 78

Tailpipes (care).......................................... 291 Tank content

Fuel....................................................... 355 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 355

Technical data Axle load (trailer operation)................... 362 Information............................................ 348 Notes (trailer hitch)................................ 361

Radio operating permits........................ 350 Tongue weight....................................... 361 Towing capacity (trailer operation)......... 361 Vehicle identification plate.................... 350

Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 261 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 261 Functions in the telephone menu.......... 261 Notes.................................................... 258 Operating modes................................... 260 Telephone menu overview..................... 260 Wireless charging (mobile phone).......... 119

Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony............................ 260

Temperature Setting the vehicle interior tempera ture........................................................ 135

Temperature grade.................................... 328 Themes

Fastening............................................... 248 Through-loading feature

see Seat

TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. 329 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 324 Tire characteristics................................... 331 Tire inflation compressor

see TIREFIT kit Tire information table............................... 324 Tire labeling

Characteristics...................................... 331 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 329 Load index............................................. 331 Load-bearing capacity........................... 331 Maximum tire load................................ 330 Maximum tire pressure......................... 330 Overview............................................... 328 Speed rating.......................................... 331 Temperature grade................................ 328 Tire Quality Grading............................... 328 Tire size designation.............................. 331 Traction grade....................................... 328 Tread wear grade................................... 328

Tire load (maximum)................................. 330 Tire pressure

Checking (manually).............................. 320

Index 451

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 322 Maximum.............................................. 330 Notes..................................................... 317 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... 323 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 322 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 323 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 320 Tire pressure table................................. 319 TIREFIT kit............................................. 298

Tire pressure loss warning system Function................................................ 323 Restarting.............................................. 323

Tire pressure monitor Function................................................ 320 Restarting.............................................. 322

Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure.................... 322 Checking the tire temperature.............. 322

Tire pressure table.................................... 319

Tire Quality Grading.................................. 328 Tire temperature

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 322 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 320

Tire tread.................................................... 316 Tire-change tool kit

Overview............................................... 339 TIREFIT kit

Storage location.................................... 298 Using..................................................... 298

Tires Changing hub caps................................ 340 Characteristics...................................... 331 Checking................................................ 316 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 320 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 322 Definitions............................................. 333 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 329 Flat tire.................................................. 296 Installing................................................ 343 Load index............................................. 331

Load-bearing capacity........................... 331 Maximum tire load................................ 330 Maximum tire pressure......................... 330 MOExtended tires.................................. 297 Noise..................................................... 316 Notes on installing................................ 336 Overview of tire labeling........................ 328 Removing.............................................. 343 Replacing...................................... 336, 340 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... 323 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 322 Rotating................................................. 339 Selection............................................... 336 Snow chains.......................................... 317 Speed rating.......................................... 331 Storing.................................................. 339 Temperature grade................................ 328 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 324 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 317 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 323 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 320 Tire pressure table................................. 319

452 Index

Tire Quality Grading............................... 328 Tire size designation.............................. 331 TIREFIT kit............................................. 298 Traction grade....................................... 328 Tread wear grade................................... 328 Unusual handling characteristics........... 316

Tongue weight............................................ 361 Tool

see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether.................................................... 59 Touch Control

On-board computer............................... 236 Operating.............................................. 242

Touchpad Operating.............................................. 242

Touchscreen (media display) Operating.............................................. 242

Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating........................... 88 Function.................................................. 87

Tow-bar system......................................... 233 Tow-starting............................................... 312

Towing a trailer Notes.................................................... 229

Towing away.............................................. 308 Towing eye

Installing................................................ 311 Storage location..................................... 311

Towing methods........................................ 307 Traction grade........................................... 328 Traffic information

Switching on the display........................ 257 Traffic light data service

Display in the Instrument Display.......... 200 Turning the display on/off..................... 202

Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes..................................... 199 Setting................................................... 200 System limitations................................. 199

Trailer hitch Attaching the ball neck.......................... 230 Care....................................................... 291 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer........... 231

Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist......................... 204

Active Lane Keeping Assist................... 205 Attaching the ball neck.......................... 230 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer........... 231

Trailer stabilization Function/notes...................................... 175

Trailer tow hitch Axle load............................................... 362 General notes........................................ 361 Notes.................................................... 229 Tongue weight....................................... 361 Towing capacity..................................... 361

Transmission position display.................. 157 Transporting

Vehicle................................................... 310 Tread wear grade...................................... 328 Trim element (Care).................................. 292 Trunk lid

see Tailgate TuneIn

Calling up.............................................. 277 Turn signal indicator................................. 122

Index 453

Turn signal light Activating/deactivating......................... 122

Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 349 Notes on installation............................. 348 Transmission output (maximum)........... 349

U Unlocking setting........................................ 67 Updates

Important system updates..................... 249 USB port

Rear passenger compartment................ 118

V Vehicle

Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 171 Collision detection (parking).................. 170 Correct use............................................. 28 Data acquisition....................................... 31 Data storage............................................ 31 Diagnostics connection........................... 27 Equipment............................................... 23 Limited Warranty..................................... 31

Locking (automatically)............................ 71 Locking (from inside)............................... 70 Locking (KEYLESS-GO)............................ 70 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)........ 72 Lowering............................................... 344 Maintenance............................................ 24 Medical aids............................................ 29 Parking for an extended period.............. 170 Problem notification................................ 30 QR code rescue card............................... 31 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 28 Raising................................................... 341 Standby mode function......................... 170 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 143 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 144 Starting (start/stop button).................. 142 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 164 Towing................................................... 233 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 70 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)......................... 70 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 80

Vehicle data Approach/departure angle................... 360 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 156 Fording depth........................................ 360

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil ity.......................................................... 360 Roof load............................................... 359 Turning radius....................................... 359 Vehicle height........................................ 359 Vehicle length........................................ 359 Vehicle width......................................... 359 Wheelbase............................................. 359

Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 35 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 34

Vehicle dimensions................................... 359 Vehicle electronics

Notes.................................................... 348 Two-way radios...................................... 348

Vehicle identification number see VIN

Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 350 VIN........................................................ 350

Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 143

454 Index

Vehicle key see SmartKey

Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 24

Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 298 Towing eye............................................. 311

Vehicle with a high center of gravity......... 29 Ventilating

Convenience opening.............................. 80 Ventilation

see Climate control Vents

see Air vents VIN

Identification plate................................ 350 Seat....................................................... 350 Windshield............................................ 350

Vision Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 138

Voice Control System Function................................................ 243 Starting................................................. 244

W Warning lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle

Removing.............................................. 295 Setting up.............................................. 295

Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 421 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)........................................ 420 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... 420 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... 419 Coolant warning lamp................... 415 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ 418

F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. 418 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp....................................................... 417 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp..... 416

ESP OFF warning lamp............... 423

ESP warning lamp flashes.......... 422

ESP warning lamp lights up........ 422 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes................................................... 417 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................. 417 Power steering warning lamp (red)....................................................... 414 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 419 6 Restraint system warning lamp..... 413 Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 413 Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 414

Index 455

! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp................................ 418 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes...................... 424 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up................... 424 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 421

Warning/indicator lamps Overview................................................ 411 PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 48

Warranty....................................................... 31 Washer fluid

see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ 289 Water tank

see Air-water duct Weather information................................. 257 Web browser

Overview (multimedia system)............... 267

Wheel change Lowering the vehicle............................. 344 Mounting a new wheel.......................... 343 Removing a wheel................................. 343 Removing/installing hub caps............... 340

Wheel rotation........................................... 339 Wheels

Care....................................................... 291 Changing hub caps................................ 340 Checking................................................ 316 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 320 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 322 Definitions............................................. 333 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 329 Flat tire.................................................. 296 Installing................................................ 343 Load index............................................. 331 Load-bearing capacity........................... 331 Maximum tire load................................ 330 Maximum tire pressure......................... 330 MOExtended tires.................................. 297 Noise..................................................... 316 Notes on installing................................ 336 Overview of tire labeling........................ 328

Removing.............................................. 343 Replacing...................................... 336, 340 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... 323 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 322 Rotating................................................. 339 Selection............................................... 336 Snow chains.......................................... 317 Speed rating.......................................... 331 Storing.................................................. 339 Temperature grade................................ 328 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 324 Tire characteristics................................ 331 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 317 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 323 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 320 Tire pressure table................................. 319 Tire Quality Grading............................... 328 Tire size designation.............................. 331 TIREFIT kit............................................. 298 Traction grade....................................... 328 Tread wear grade................................... 328 Unusual handling characteristics........... 316

456 Index

Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 250

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis play

Instrument cluster................................... 12 Window curtain airbag............................... 43 Windows

see Side windows Windows (care).......................................... 291 Windshield

Defrosting.............................................. 135 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 128

Windshield see Windshield

Windshield washer fluid Notes..................................................... 357

Windshield washer system Topping up............................................. 287

Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating......................... 127 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 128

Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 317

Wiper blades Care....................................................... 291 Replacing............................................... 128

Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 118 Mobile phone......................................... 119

Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity........................ 26

Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 457

</

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GLC Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz GLC as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz GLC. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2021 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.